contract documents volume iv of vi...
TRANSCRIPT
Bids will be opened at 1:30 pm, Wednesday, October 16, 2013 in the Board Room, Second Floor of the District’s Administration Building, 375 11th Street, Oakland, California
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
VOLUME IV OF VI
SPECIFICATIONS AND APPENDICES(DIVISIONS 40-44, APPENDICES)
SPECIFICATION 2047
SET NO. ________________
EL PORTAL RESERVOIR REHABILITATION ANDALMOND PUMPING PLANT REPLACEMENT
EAST BAY MUNICIPAL UTILITY DISTRICT
SPECIFICATION 2047
EL PORTAL RESERVOIR REHABILITATION ANDALMOND PUMPING PLANT REPLACEMENT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
VOLUME I - BIDDING DOCUMENTS AND SPECIFICATIONS (DIVISIONS 00 THROUGH 04)
DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING DOCUMENTS00 01 10 Table of Contents
00 11 13 Notice to Contractors
00 21 13 Instructions to Bidders
00 30 05 Offices to Contact
00 31 22 Dive Report Information
00 31 24 Materials Assessment Information
00 31 32 Geotechnical Data
00 41 02 Bid Form
00 41 05 Description of Bid Items
00 42 00 Proposal
00 43 13 Bidder’s Bond
00 43 39 Contract Equity Program and Equal Employment Opportunity Guidelines
00 45 13 Bidder's Qualifications and References
00 45 14 Manufacturer Form
00 45 19 Declaration of Noncollusion
00 45 46 Declaration of Eligibility to Work on Public Works Projects
00 51 00 Execution of Contract
00 52 00 Contract
00 61 13.13 Faithful Performance Bond
00 61 13.16 Payment Bond
00 62 00 Insurance Requirements
00 62 16.11 Certificate of Workers' Compensation Insurance
00 62 16.13 Certificate of Commercial General and Auto Liability Insurance
08/19/132047 00 01 10 - 1 Table of Contents
00 62 16.14 Certificate of Pollution Liability Insurance
00 62 16.15 Certificate of Builder's Risk Insurance
00 72 00 General Conditions
00 73 00 Supplementary General Conditions
DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS01 11 00 Summary of Work
01 14 00 Work Restrictions
01 21 00 Allowances
01 24 13 Value Engineering
01 29 00 Payment Procedures
01 31 19 Project Meetings
01 31 23.10 Web-based Construction Document Management
01 32 00 Construction Progress Documentation
01 33 00 Submittal Procedures
01 35 24 Project Safety Requirements
01 35 44 Environmental Requirements
01 35 53 Security Procedures
01 42 19 Reference Standards
01 43 11 Seismic Requirements
01 45 27 Shop Inspection
01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls
01 55 26 Traffic Regulation
01 61 00 Common Product Requirements
01 61 01 Electrical Requirements for Mechanical Package Systems
01 64 05 District-Furnished Materials
01 74 05 Cleaning
01 75 17 Field Testing and Startup
01 77 00 Closeout Procedures
01 79 00 Demonstration and Training
01 91 13.10 Asset Identification Tags
08/19/132047 00 01 10 - 2 Table of Contents
DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS02 21 13 Construction Survey
02 41 13 Selective Site Demolition
02 82 13 Asbestos Abatement
02 83 13 Lead Hazard Control Activities
DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE03 11 00 Concrete Forming
03 15 13 Waterstops
03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcing
03 30 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete
03 35 00 Concrete Finishing
03 35 20 Concrete Architectural Finishes
03 39 00 Concrete Curing
03 41 00 Precast Structural Concrete
03 48 00 Precast Concrete Specialties
03 62 00 Non-Shrink Grouting
03 62 19 Repair Mortar
DIVISION 04 – MASONRY04 23 00 Glass Unit Masonry
VOLUME II - SPECIFICATIONS (DIVISIONS 05 THROUGH 26)
DIVISION 05 - METALS05 05 14 Hot-Dip Galvanizing
05 05 24 Pipe Welding
05 05 26 Flange Bolting
05 12 00 Structural Steel Framing
05 31 00 Steel Decking
05 40 00 Cold-Formed Metal Framing
05 50 00 Metal Fabrications
08/19/132047 00 01 10 - 3 Table of Contents
DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES06 10 53 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry
DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION07 12 00 Bituminous Waterproofing
07 19 00 Water Repellents
07 21 00 Thermal Insulation
07 22 00 Roof and Deck Insulation
07 33 13 Asphalt Shingles
07 60 00 Flashing and Sheet Metal
07 72 25 Reservoir Roof Vent
07 92 00 Joint Sealants
DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS08 31 05 Access Hatches and Vault Hatches
08 31 10 Roof Hatches
08 33 23 Overhead Coiling Doors
08 34 73 Sound Control Door Assemblies
08 71 00 Door Hardware
08 91 00 Louvers
DIVISION 09 - FINISHES09 22 10 Non-Structural Metal Framing
09 29 00 Gypsum Board
09 84 10 Acoustical Panels
09 91 00 Painting
09 96 35.05 Zinc-Rich Coatings
09 96 56.05 High-Build Epoxy Coatings
09 96 56.10 Fusion-Bonded Epoxy Coatings
09 96 57 Mechanical and Electrical Coating Systems
09 97 23 Coating Systems for Concrete Structures
08/19/132047 00 01 10 - 4 Table of Contents
DIVISION 10 – SPECIALITIES10 14 00 Signage
10 28 00 Toilet Accessories
10 44 00 Fire Protection Specialties
DIVISION 11 – NOT USED
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS12 31 01 Shop Furniture
DIVISIONS 13 THROUGH 21 – NOT USED
DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING22 13 16 Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping
22 30 00.01 Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment
22 45 00 Emergency Plumbing Fixtures
DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING23 05 03 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing HVAC
23 07 00 HVAC Insulation
23 09 13.13 Actuators and Operators for HVAC
23 31 13 Metal Ducts
23 33 00 Air Duct Accessories
23 34 00 HVAC Fans
23 73 13.10 Precision Air Handler Units
DIVISIONS 24 THROUGH 25 – NOT USED
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical
26 05 13 Medium-Voltage Cables
26 05 19 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables
08/19/132047 00 01 10 - 5 Table of Contents
26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems
26 05 33 Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems
26 05 36 Cable Trays for Electrical Systems
26 05 43 Underground Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems
26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems
26 05 83 Low Voltage Motors
26 08 00 Commissioning of Electrical Systems
26 09 13 Electrical Power Monitoring and Control
26 09 23 Lighting Control Devices
26 13 23 Medium-Voltage Metalclad Switchgear
26 18 40 Medium-Voltage Variable Frequency Drives26 22 13 Low-Voltage Distribution Transformers
26 24 16 Panelboards
26 27 26 Wiring Devices
26 28 13 Fuses
26 28 16 Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers
26 29 13.13 Across the Line Motor Controllers
26 51 13 Interior Lighting Fixtures, Lamps, and Ballasts
26 52 00 Emergency Lighting
26 53 00 Exit Signs
VOLUME III - SPECIFICATIONS (DIVISIONS 27 THROUGH 39)
DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS27 05 00 Common Work Results for Communications
27 08 00 Commissioning of Communications Systems
27 11 13 Communications Entrance Protection
27 11 19 Communications Terminal Blocks and Patch Panels
27 13 23 Communications Optical Fiber Backbone Cabling
27 15 00.16 Voice Communications Horizontal Cabling
27 15 43 Communications Faceplates and Connectors
27 21 16 Data Communications Routers, CSU/DSU, Multiplexers, Codecs, and Modems
27 21 23 Data Communications Switches and Hubs
08/19/132047 00 01 10 - 6 Table of Contents
DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY28 13 33.16 Access Control Interfaces to Access Door Control
28 16 19 Intrusion Detection Remote Devices and Sensors
DIVISIONS 29 THROUGH 30 – NOT USED
DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK31 11 00 Clearing and Grubbing
31 23 16 Excavation
31 23 19 Dewatering
31 23 23 Fill
31 23 23.15 Imported Backfill and Drain Rock Materials
31 23 23.33 Controlled Density Fill
31 23 23.34 Controlled Low Strength Material
31 34 19.13 Geosynthetic Filter Fabric
31 63 29 Drilled Shafts and Soldier Piles
DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 32 12 16 Asphalt Paving
32 12 16.81 Asphalt Pavement Replacement
32 31 13 Chain Link Fence and Gates
32 32 23.1632 84 00
Concrete Modular Retaining WallPlanting Irrigation
32 90 00 Planting
DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES33 09 11 Instruments and Recorders
33 09 70 Instrumentation and Control for Electrical Utilities
33 10 01 Protection from Corrosion
33 11 03 Fabrication of Steel Pipe – 24-inch and Larger
33 11 06 Fabricated Pipe Specials
08/19/132047 00 01 10 - 7 Table of Contents
33 11 07 Specialty Couplings for Mechanical Piping
33 11 13.05 Installation of Steel Pipe
33 11 13.10 Polywrap
33 11 13.35 Fabrication and Installation of High Density Polyethylene Pipe
33 11 13.50 Mortar Lining for Steel Pipe
33 11 13.60 Mortar Coating for Steel Pipe
33 11 13.62 Dielectric Coatings for Steel Pipe
33 12 01 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods
33 12 16.05 Miscellaneous Valves
33 12 16.11 Resilient-Seated Gate Valves
33 12 16.15 AWWA Butterfly Valves
33 12 16.16 High Performance Butterfly Valves
33 12 16.20 Dual-Disc Check Valves
33 12 16.27 AWWA Ball Valves
33 12 16.32 Powered Valve Actuators
33 12 16.40 Surge Control-Pressure Relief Valve
33 12 23.10 Vertical Turbine Pumps
33 12 23.12 Vertical Turbine Pump Motors
33 12 27.11 Strainers and Filters
33 12 28.11 Miscellaneous Piping Specialties
33 16 02 Reservoir Draining and Sediment Removal
33 16 05 Concrete Reservoir Leakage Testing
33 46 16 Subdrainage Piping
33 46 23.19 Geosynthetic Drainage Layers
33 46 26 Geotextile Subsurface Drainage Filtration
33 71 19 Electrical Underground Ducts and Manholes
33 72 33 Control House Equipment
DIVISIONS 34 THROUGH 39 – NOT USED
08/19/132047 00 01 10 - 8 Table of Contents
VOLUME IV - SPECIFICATIONS (DIVISIONS 40 THROUGH 44, and APPENDICES)
DIVISION 40 - PROCESS INTEGRATION40 01 70 Supplemental Training Requirements for Process Integration
40 20 20 Mechanical Piping
40 42 13.10 Process Piping Thermal Insulation
40 80 00 Commissioning of Process Systems
40 90 00 Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems
40 94 13 Digital Process Control Computers
40 94 33 Operator Interface Units
40 94 43 Programmable Logic Process Controllers
40 95 13 Process Control Panels and Hardware
DIVISION 41 - MATERIAL PROCESSING AND HANDLING EQUIPMENT41 22 13.13 Overhead Bridge Cranes
DIVISION 42 – NOT USED
DIVISION 43 - PROCESS GAS AND LIQUID HANDLING, PURIFICATION ANDSTORAGE EQUIPMENT
43 21 13.15 In-Line Centrifugal Pumps
DIVISION 44 – NOT USED
APPENDIX A – Forms and Schedules
APPENDIX B – Materials Assessment Testing
APPENDIX C – Listing of Sole Source Products
APPENDIX D – Alameda County Encroachment Permit Forms and Traffic Control Plan
APPENDIX E – Title 22 Regulated VOCs
VOLUMES V AND VI – DRAWINGS (bound separately)
Volume V - El Portal Reservoir RehabilitationVolume VI - Almond Pumping Plant Replacement
08/19/132047 00 01 10 - 9 Table of Contents
SECTION 40 01 70
SUPPLEMENTAL TRAINING REQUIREMENTS FOR PROCESS INTEGRATION PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Work included: Perform training of District personnel for furnished or installed Process Control equipment, systems, software, and networks. Develop trainingprogram including scheduling, and coordination of training activities and training materials. Training procedures and requirements found in Specification Section 01 79 00 shall also apply.
B. Related sections:
1. Section 01 79 00 - Demonstration and Training
C. Tailor the training program to meet the specific needs of District personnel. Include classroom and field instruction for engineers, operators and maintenance personnel.
D. A "week" shall consist of 40 hours of actual instruction time. A "day" shall consist of 8 hours of actual instruction time. The actual training schedule shall be coordinated with the District.
1.2 OWNER’S INSTRUCTIONS
A. Operations and Maintenance Training: O&M training for each primary element and subsystem shall be in accordance with the requirements specified under the associated section. All training shall be given using equipment similar to the equipment provided in these Contract Documents.
B. The bid shall include the following number of days of training time and round tripsfor Operations and Maintenance training services described in this Section for a representative from the Process Control Systems Contractor (PCSC):
08/19/13 Supplemental Training Requirements2047 40 01 70 - 1 For Process Integration
Site Days/Hours Number of Round Trips
Almond Pumping PlantO&M Training –
Session # 1
1 day
@
8 hours per day
1
Almond Pumping PlantO&M Training –
Session # 2
1 day
@
8 hours per day
1
1. The content of training shall include the following:
a. Loop Functions: Understanding the details of each loop and how they function.
b. Calibration and adjustment.
c. Adjustments: For example, controller tuning constants, current switch trip points, etc.
d. Troubleshooting and diagnosis.
e. Component removal and replacement: For example, whole units.
f. Periodic maintenance.
2. The representative from the PCSC shall be present at the site or classroom designated in Section 01 79 00, for the minimum person-days listed, travel time excluded. This training shall be provided for each type of component and function provided in and by the Process Control System (PCS), excluding programming of the PCS.
3. Each training session will have 16 attendees.
4. Schedule this training so that it does not overlap with any of the other training specified in this Section.
5. The content of both of the training sessions shall be identical. The bid shall not assume that the two training sessions will overlap or will occur in one round trip by the manufacturer’s representative. Two separate maintenance workgroups will attend the training and the sessions will be scheduled at a
08/19/13 Supplemental Training Requirements2047 40 01 70 - 2 For Process Integration
mutually convenient time for all parties. The bid should plan for two independent mobilizations and round trips on the part of the PCSC representative.
C. Process Control System (PCS) PLC Training:
1. The bid shall include the following number of days of training time and round trips for training services described in this Section for a certified Rockwell Personal Trainer:
Site Days/Hours Number of Round Trips
Almond Pumping Plant PCS PLC Training –
Session # 1
4 consecutive days
@
8 hours per day
1
Almond Pumping PlantPCS PLC Training –
Session # 2
4 consecutive days
@
8 hours per day
1
2. The Contractor shall provide the following tailored, on-site training conducted by a certified Rockwell Personal Trainer at the training location specified in Section 01 79 00:
a. A training session similar in format and content to Rockwell course number CCPS41, with the exception that the course should completelyconcentrate on the MicroLogix 1400 hardware specified on this project.General course content shall be as follows:
a. Identifying all MicroLogix 1400 hardware components used in the project.
b. Communicating with a MicroLogix 1400 processor using RSLogix 500 software.
c. Ethernet DNP 3.0 and Modbus RTU communications.
d. Creating a new project.
e. Determining addresses; assigning symbols; entering, editing, and verifying ladder logic; organizing the data table.
08/19/13 Supplemental Training Requirements2047 40 01 70 - 3 For Process Integration
f. Determining program flow and creating subroutines.
g. Entering and searching for documentation.
h. Testing a project.
b. The training course shall be hands-on, with the instructor providing training workstations for each attendee having hardware identical to that specified on this project. In this course, attendees shall create a sample program, step-by-step, to meet the requirements of a given functional specification using RSLogix 500. Each lesson in the course shall be devoted to a step in the programming sequence, with the instructor presenting each step and demonstrating the procedure required to complete it using the training workstations.
c. At the conclusion of the course, attendees should be able to use RSLogix 500 to select the appropriate instructions, draft, program, and test ladder logic with the MicroLogix 1400 hardware. Attendees should also be able to set up Ethernet DNP 3.0 and Modbus RTU communication.
3. Each training session will have 16 attendees.
4. Schedule this training so that it does not overlap with any of the other training specified in this Section.
5. The content of both of the training sessions shall be identical. The bid shall not assume that the two training sessions will overlap or will occur in one round trip by the manufacturer’s representative. Two separate maintenance workgroups will attend the training and the sessions will be scheduled at a mutually convenient time for all parties. The bid should plan for two independent mobilizations and round trips on the part of the Rockwell Personal Trainer.
D. SCADA RTU Training:
1. The bid shall include the following number of days of training time and round trips for training services described in this Section for a certified Schneider Electric Control Microsystems Personal Trainer:
08/19/13 Supplemental Training Requirements2047 40 01 70 - 4 For Process Integration
Site Days/Hours Number of Round Trips
Almond Pumping Plant SCADA RTU Training
– Session # 1
4 consecutive days
@
8 hours per day
1
Almond Pumping Plant SCADA RTU Training
– Session # 2
4 consecutive days
@
8 hours per day
1
2. The Contractor shall provide the following tailored, on-site training conducted by a certified Schneider Electric Control Microsystems Personal Trainer at the training location specified in Section 01 79 00:
a. “Telepace Studio Programming and SCADAPack Controller Three Day Training Session”. General course content shall be as follows:
a. SCADAPack controller hardware.
b. Series 5000 I/O modules.
c. Telepace ladder logic software
d. SCADAPack controller communication.
b. “DNP3 Protocol Configuration One Day Training Session”. General course content shall be as follows:
a. DNP3 protocol configuration, including master mode, slave mode, unsolicited messages, object classes, and Ethernet and serial communication.
3. Telepace Studio and DNP3 training sessions shall be completed back-to-back in an overall four day training program with 16 attendees.
4. Schedule this training so that it does not overlap with any of the other training specified in this Section.
5. The content of both of the training sessions shall be identical. The bid shall not assume that the two training sessions will overlap or will occur in one round trip by the manufacturer’s representative. Two separate maintenance
08/19/13 Supplemental Training Requirements2047 40 01 70 - 5 For Process Integration
workgroups will attend the training and the sessions will be scheduled at a mutually convenient time for all parties. The bid should plan for two independent mobilizations and round trips on the part of the Schneider Electric Control Microsystems Personal Trainer.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be made in accordance with Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures.
PART 2 - NOT USED
PART 3 - NOT USED
END OF SECTION
08/19/13 Supplemental Training Requirements2047 40 01 70 - 6 For Process Integration
SECTION 40 20 20
MECHANICAL PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Work included: Furnish and install all piping and piping appurtenances as shown on the drawings and as specified herein.
B. Work not included: factory production of pipe and fabricated fittings 24-inch and larger and installation, as shown on Drawings W-10030-1 through -24, which is covered by the following Sections:
1. Section 33 11 03 – Fabrication of Steel Pipe - 24-inch and Larger
2. Section 33 11 13.05 – Installation of Steel Pipe
C. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 01 75 17 – Field Testing and Startup.
2. Section 01 45 27 – Shop Inspection
3. Section 05 05 24 – Pipe Welding.
4. Section 05 05 26 – Flange Bolting.
5. Section 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications.
6. Section 09 96 56.05 – High-Build Epoxy Coatings
7. Section 09 96 56.10 – Fusion Bonded Epoxy Coatings.
8. Section 22 05 53.05 – Pipe Identification.
9. Section 22 13 16 – Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping.
10. Section 26 05 00 – Common Work Results for Electrical.
11. Section 31 23 16 – Excavation.
12. Section 33 10 01 – Protection from Corrosion.
13. Section 33 11 06 – Fabricated Pipe Specials.
14. Section 33 11 07 – Specialty Couplings for Mechanical Piping.
08/19/132047 40 20 20 - 1 Mechanical Piping
15. Section 33 11 13.05 – Installation of Steel Pipe.
16. Section 33 12 01 – Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods.
17. Section 33 12 27.11 – Strainers and Filters.
18. Section 33 12 28.11 – Miscellaneous Piping Specialties.
1.2 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Delivery: All materials that will not be installed the same day as delivered to the site shall be stored in the original manufacturer's packaging. Loose items with no original packaging shall be boxed to protect the products from scratches, abrasion, or breakage.
B. Protection Prior to Installation:
1. All products shall be transported, handled and stored in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
2. All products shall be protected from excessive heat, moisture, and other adverse environmental conditions during storage and handling.
3. All plastic materials shall be stored out of direct sunlight.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit Prior to Shipment:
1. Submit a list of pipe, fittings, and appurtenances to be used for the work. The list shall include the following information, where applicable:
a. Materials (show conformance with listed ASTM specifications).
b. Size/Schedule (show conformance with listed ASTM and ANSI specifications).
c. Pressure/Temperature Ratings.
d. Manufacturer.
2. A signed “Manufacturer’s Certificate of Compliance” stating that all material has been manufactured, passivated, sampled, tested and inspected in accordance with the specified standards. The applicable standards shall be listed on the certificate.
3. For steel and stainless steel pipe, flanges and fittings, chemical analysis certification report (mill test report and/or post-mill test report).
08/19/132047 40 20 20 - 2 Mechanical Piping
4. Manufacturers' published catalog information for all equipment and products.
5. Shop Fabrication Drawings:
a. Shop drawings for piping fabrication shall include the following details at a minimum:
1) Drawings shall contain scale plan, section and detail views.Sufficient detail shall be provided to fabricate and install the design.
2) Drawings shall contain complete piping dimensions for the fabrication of all piping sections.
3) Piping components shall be called out with sequentially numbered item bubbles.
4) All piping and fittings that are over 2” nominal size shall be drawn to scale in a two-line format. Piping that is 2” and smaller may be shown with a single line representation.
5) Drawings Material Lists: The “ITEM” column shall match the individual bubble call-outs. The “REQUIRED” column shall indicate exact quantities of components. Provide lengths rounded up.The “DESCRIPTION” column has the following required format: “Component, Size, Material with applicable material standard, Ratings with applicable construction standard, Configuration(s), End Type”. Refer to the example below.
EXAMPLE MATERIAL LIST
ITEM REQD DESCRIPTION
1 20 FT PIPE, 12”, STL ASTM A53 GR B, ASME B36.10 STD WT
2 6 FLANGE, 8”, STL ASTM A105, ASME B16.5 150 LB, SLIP-ON, FF
3 4 ELBOW, 6”, STL ASTM A105, ASME B16.9 STD WT, 45 DEG, BWE
4 2 THREADED OUTLET, 1” NPT OUTLET X 12” RUN, STL, 3000 LB
6. At the request of the Engineer, submit records of mathematical analyses or successful proof testing of the manufacturer’s wrought fitting design per ASME B16.9-2.2.
7. Factory, Shop and Field Finishes.
8. NSF/ANSI 61 certification for all materials in contact with drinking water.
08/19/132047 40 20 20 - 3 Mechanical Piping
9. Manufacturer's instructions for installation of products and equipment.
10. Pipe identification system.
B. Submit 45 Calendar Days Prior to Cleaning and Testing:
1. Cleaning and disinfection plan.
2. Piping Field Test Schedule: Each test shall be numbered and the boundaries shall be illustrated on the related P&ID. Refer to the “Mechanical Piping Schedule”.
3. Piping field test equipment and instrument calibration sheets.
C. Provide evidence of certification from the PVC and CPVC manufacturer(s) for personnel installing such materials, when requested by the Engineer.
D. Submit Prior to System Start-up:
1. All signed results and records of piping field testing, including “Piping Pressure Test Records”, to demonstrate that completion of all testing was successfully executed.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. American Water Works Association (AWWA):
1. C110, Ductile Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings, 3” through 48”.
2. C206, Field Welding of Steel Water Pipe.
3. C653, Disinfection of Water Treatment Plants.
B. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):
1. B1.20.1, Pipe Threads, General Purpose, Inch.
2. B16.1, Cast Iron Pipe Flanges And Flanged Fittings.
3. B16.3, Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings.
4. B16.5, Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings.
5. B16.9, Factory-Made Wrought Steel Buttwelding Fittings.
6. B16.11, Forged Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded.
7. B16.15, Cast Bronze Threaded Fittings, Classes 125 and 250.
08/19/132047 40 20 20 - 4 Mechanical Piping
8. B16.18, Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.
9. B16.22, Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.
10. B16.24, Cast Copper Alloy Pipe Flanges & Flanged Fittings: Class 150, 300,400, 600, 900, 1500 & 2500.
11. B16.26, Cast Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes.
12. B16.28, Wrought Steel Buttwelding Short Radius Elbows And Returns.
13. B16.36, Orifice Flanges.
14. B16.42, Ductile Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: Classes 150 and 300.
15. B16.47, Large Diameter Steel Flanges.
16. B31.5, Refrigeration Piping.
17. B31.9, Building Services Piping.
18. B36.10, Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe.
19. B36.19, Stainless Steel Pipe.
C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. D2855, Standard Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings.
2. B280 Specification for Seamless Copper Tube for Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Field Service.
D. Air Conditioning, Refrigeration and Heating Institute (ARI):
1. 495, Refrigerant Liquid Receivers.
2. 710, Liquid Line Dryers.
3. 730, Flow Capacity Rating and Application of Suction Line Filters and Filter-Driers.
4. 750, Thermostatic Refrigerant Expansion Valves.
5. 760, Solenoid Valves for Use with Volatile Refrigerants.
E. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning Engineers(ASHRAE):
08/19/132047 40 20 20 - 5 Mechanical Piping
1. 15, Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems.
2. 34, Number Designations of Refrigerants.
F. Manufacturers' Standardization Society (MSS):
1. SP-25, Standard Marking System for Valves, Fittings, Flanges and Unions.
2. SP-58, Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacture.
3. SP-69, Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application.
4. SP-89, Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation.
G. Pipe Fabrication Institute (PFI):
1. ES-3, Fabricating Tolerances.
2. ES-4, Hydrostatic Testing of Fabricated Piping.
3. ES-24, Pipe Bending Methods, Tolerances, Process and Material Requirements.
H. Title 24, Part 5, California Plumbing Code, Latest Edition.
08/19/132047 40 20 20 - 6 Mechanical Piping
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 STEEL PIPE, AND STEEL AND IRON FITTINGS, [STL]
PIPE Materials,Manufacture & Testing:
NPS 24” and Smaller:
ASTM A53, Type E or S, Grade B.
NPS 48” and Smaller:
ASTM A106-S1, Grade B.
52” and Larger: API 5L-2004, Grade B, PSL 2. See API 5L Stipulations hereinafter.
Construction / Dimensions:
NPS 48” and smaller: ASME B36.10, Standard weight (unless otherwise shown)
52” and larger: Steel cylinder OD, wall thickness, lining and coating as shown on the drawings. See API 5L Stipulations hereinafter.
FITTINGS Materials,Manufacture & Testing::
Manufactured Fittings:
Wrought Steel: ASTM A234, Grade WPB.
Forged Steel: ASTM A105, Grade B.
Cast Iron for Fittings: ASTM A48 Class tensile strengths by fitting size as required per AWWA C110.
Ductile Iron for Fittings: ASTM A536 (all Grades).
Malleable Iron for Fittings: ASTM A197.
Fabricated Fittings:
Steel Plate for AWWA C208 fittings: ASTM A36; or ASTM A283 Grade D; or ASTM A1011-SS Grade 36; or A1018-SSGrade 36.
Construction / Dimensions:
Manufactured Fittings:
Wrought Steel Buttweld Fittings: ASME B16.9.
Forged Steel Fittings: ASME B16.11.
Wrought Steel Short Radius Elbows: ASME B16.28
Flanged Ductile Iron and Gray Iron Fittings, 3” to 48”: AWWA C110-08, ASME B16.42, class as shown
Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings, 2” and smaller: AMSE
08/19/132047 40 20 20 - 7 Mechanical Piping
2.1 STEEL PIPE, AND STEEL AND IRON FITTINGS, [STL]
B16.3, class 150 unless otherwise shown.
Fabricated Fittings:
AWWA C208 and per the drawings.
FLANGES Materials: ASME Steel Forgings: ASTM A105 Grade B, or, ASTM A182 Grade F2.
AWWA Steel Forgings: ASTM A105 Grade B, or, A181Class 70.
AWWA Steel Plate: ASTM A36; ASTM A516 grade 65 or 70; or ASTM A283 Grade D; or ASTM A1011-SS Grade 36; or A1018-SS Grade 36.
Construction / Dimensions:
Service pressures 175 psig and under: All flanges shall be flat faced and as specified herein unless otherwise shown.
ASME Slip-On or Welding Neck Type, NPS 24” and smaller: ASME B16.5, Class 150 unless otherwise shown.
ASME Welding Neck Type, NPS 26” thru 60”: ASME B16.47, Series A, Class 150 unless otherwise shown.
AWWA Steel Forged or Plate Flanges, 12” and smaller: AWWA C207-07, Class D unless otherwise shown.
AWWA Steel Forged or Plate Flanges, 16” and larger: AWWA C207-07, Class D unless otherwise shown. (150 psig max service pressure)
Refer to Standard Drawing 323-EA.
Service pressures 275 psig and under: All flanges shall be flat faced and as specified herein unless otherwise shown.
ASME Slip-On or Welding Neck Type, NPS 24” and smaller: ASME B16.5, Class 150 unless otherwise shown.
ASME Welding Neck Type, NPS 26” thru 60”: ASME B16.47, Series A, Class 150 unless otherwise shown.
AWWA Steel Forged or Plate Flanges, 108” and smaller: AWWA C207-07, Class E unless otherwise shown.
Refer to Standard Drawing 324-EA.
Service pressures from above 275 psig to 600 psig maximum: All flanges shall be raised face and as specified herein unless otherwise shown.
ASME Slip-On or Welding Neck Type, NPS 24” and
08/19/132047 40 20 20 - 8 Mechanical Piping
2.1 STEEL PIPE, AND STEEL AND IRON FITTINGS, [STL]
smaller: ASME B16.5, Class 300 unless otherwise shown.
ASME Welding Neck Type, NPS 26” thru 60”: ASME B16.47, Series A, Class 300 unless otherwise shown.
Refer to Standard Drawing 325-EA.
Marking Requirements: Refer to “Fittings, Flange and Union Markings” hereinafter.
Orifice Flanges: ASME B16.36
END OF [STL]
2.2 GALVANIZED STEEL PIPE, [GST]
PIPE Materials,Manufacture & Testing:
2-inch and smaller: ASTM A53 per [STL]
Hot-dip galvanize all pipe per ASTM A53 - “Galvanized Pipe”.
Construction / Dimensions:
2-inch and smaller: Same as [STL]
FITTINGS Materials: Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings, 2” and smaller: ASTM A197; Hot-dip galvanize all fittings per ASTM A153.
Construction / Dimensions:
Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings, 2” and smaller: ASME B16.3, Class 150 unless otherwise shown.
END OF [GST]
08/19/132047 40 20 20 - 9 Mechanical Piping
2.3 STAINLESS STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS, [SST]
PIPE Materials,Manufacture & Testing:
ASTM A312(-S1 for over 2-inch NPS)
ASTM A358 Class 2(-S1-S2 for over 2-inch NPS)
ASTM A376(-S1 for over 2-inch NPS).
Pipe shall be either seamless or have a single longitudinal (straight) seam weld.
All pipes shall be cleaned, de-scaled and passivated per ASTM A380 and A967.
Threaded Joints: Grades TP304 or TP316 as shown.
Welded Joints: Grades TP304L or TP316L
Construction / Dimensions:
ASME B36.19, SCH 40S unless otherwise shown
FITTINGS Materials,Manufacture & Testing::
ASTM A182:
Threaded: Grades F304 or F316 as shown.
Welded: Grades F304L or F316L as shown.
ASTM A403:
Threaded: Grades WP304 or WP316 as shown.
Welded: Grades WP304L or WP316L as shown.
All fittings shall be cleaned, de-scaled and passivated per ASTM A380 and A967.
Construction / Dimensions :
Wrought Buttweld Fittings: ASME B16.9.
Forged Fittings:
ASME B16.11, Class 3000 unless otherwise shown.
MSS SP-114-2007, when Class 150 fittings are shown.
Wrought Short Radius Elbows: ASME B16.28
08/19/132047 40 20 20 - 10 Mechanical Piping
2.3 STAINLESS STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS, [SST]
FLANGES Materials: ASTM A182 Grade F304 or F316
Construction / Dimensions :
Service pressures 175 psig and under: All flanges shall be flat faced and as specified herein unless otherwise shown.
Steel Plate Flanges, 12” and smaller: AWWA C207-07, Class D unless otherwise shown.
Plate Flanges, 16” and larger: AWWA C207-07, Class D unless otherwise shown. (150 psig max service pressure)
Refer to Standard Drawing 323-EA.
Service pressures 275 psig and under: All flanges shall be flat faced and as specified herein unless otherwise shown. If grade 304L or 316L is used, the maximum pressure rating is de-rated to 230 psig.
Slip-On or Welding Neck Type, NPS 24” and smaller: ASME B16.5, Class 150 unless otherwise shown.
Welding Neck Type, NPS 26” thru 60”: ASME B16.47, Series A Class 150 unless otherwise shown.
Plate Flanges, 108” and smaller: AWWA C207-07, Class E unless otherwise shown.
Refer to Standard Drawing 324-EA.
Service pressures from above 275 psig to 600 psig maximum: All flanges shall be raised face and as specified herein unless otherwise shown.
Slip-On or Welding Neck Type, NPS 24” and smaller: ASME B16.5, Class 300 unless otherwise shown.
Welding Neck Type, NPS 26” thru 60”: ASME B16.47, Series A Class 300 unless otherwise shown.
Refer to Standard Drawing 325-EA.
Marking Requirements: Refer to “Fittings, Flange and Union Markings” hereinafter.
Orifice Flanges: ASME B16.36
END OF [SST]
08/19/132047 40 20 20 - 11 Mechanical Piping
2.4 STAINLESS STEEL INSTRUMENT TUBING, [SSI]
PIPE
Materials: ASTM A269, Grade TP 304L or TP 316L, Rockwell B Hardness 80 or less
Construction / Dimensions:
Tube OD (in) Tube Wall Thickness (in)
1/8 0.028
3/16 0.035
¼ 0.035
3/8 0.035
FITTINGSMaterials: 316 Stainless Steel
Construction / Dimensions:
Double Ferrule Compression Fittings (see Manufactured Fittings below).
INSULATION Materials & Construction
Per Section 40 42 13.10.
END OF [SSI]
08/19/132047 40 20 20 - 12 Mechanical Piping
2.5 PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS, [PVC]
PIPEMaterials: ASTM D1784, Class 12454-B
Construction / Dimensions: ASTM D1785, Schedule 80 unless otherwise shown
JOINTS
Solvent-welded using:
Primer per ASTM F656; See “Miscellaneous Components” for acceptable products.
Solvent cement per ASTM F493; See “Miscellaneous Components” for acceptable products.
Threaded Connections: use only where connecting to unions, valves, and equipment that may require future disassembly, and as shown on the drawings.
Threaded Sealing Compound: Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE). See “Miscellaneous Components” for acceptable products.
Flanges
Van Stone type (Two-Piece), 150-psi @ 73degF rating unless otherwise shown. Van Stone flanges 2-inch and larger shall have a solid plastic ring of continuous thickness with no depressions or other thickness reductions.
FITTINGSMaterials: (same as pipe)
Construction / Dimensions :
Socket: ASTM D2467
Threaded: ASTM D2464
IDENTIFICATION SYSTEM
Above ground: ID markers per section 22 05 53.05.
Underground: Pipe tracer wire and marking tape per Section 33 12 28.11.
END OF [PVC]
08/19/132047 40 20 20 - 13 Mechanical Piping
2.6 COPPER TUBING AND FITTINGS, [CU]
PIPE Materials:
General water service: Type K, hard temper (no coils), ASTM B88
Buried water service: Type K, hard temper or coils, ASTM B88, blue polyethylene coating of 0.025-inch min thickness.Acceptable products: Mueller PlumbShield, Kamco Aqua-shield, or equal as approved by the Engineer.
Instrument service: seamless per ASTM B75, 050 (lightly annealed) temper.
FITTINGS
Materials:
Wrought copper or bronze, socket type: ASTM B75
Compression: Brass
Flared: Brass
Construction / Dimensions:
Cast Soldered, ASME B16.18
Wrought Soldered: ASME B16.22
Compression: See Manufactured Fittings below
45–degree Flared: See Manufactured Fittings below
FLANGES
Construction / Dimensions:
Cast flat-faced, ASME B16.24, Class 150 (unless otherwise shown)
Materials : ASTM B61 alloy C92200 or B62 alloy C83600.
JOINTS Construction: Soldered: per ASTM B828
SOLDERMaterials: ASTM B32, Type Sn95, Sn94, E, AC, AM or WS – Solid core
only. 0.20% maximum lead content.
END OF [CU]
08/19/132047 40 20 20 - 14 Mechanical Piping
2.7 BRASS PIPE AND FITTINGS, [BRS]
PIPEMaterials: ASTM B43
Construction / Dimensions: ASTM B43, Regular
FITTINGSMaterials: Threaded Bronze: ASTM B62
Construction / Dimensions: ASME B16.15, Class 125 unless otherwise shown.
END OF [BRS]
2.8 API 5L STIPULATIONS
A. Where API 5L pipe is specified, the following stipulations shall apply:
1. Product Specification Level (PSL) 2 and all the related requirements.
2. The manufacturing process shall be limited to one of the following:
a. Seamless
b. Electric Welding with Filler Material:
1) Submerged-arc single longitudinal (straight) seam weld.
2) Gas Metal-arc single longitudinal (straight) seam weld.
c. Electric Resistance Welding without filler material, single longitudinal (straight) seam weld, with post-weld heat treatment.
3. No jointer welds allowed.
4. Certificate of compliance, with test results.
5. Fracture toughness tests.
6. Ultrasonic or electromagnetic examination of welds.
7. Hydrostatic tests.
8. Marking requirements.
08/19/132047 40 20 20 - 15 Mechanical Piping
9. Purchaser inspection at both the pipe manufacturing plant and piping fabrication facility.
2.9 FITTING, FLANGE AND UNION MARKINGS
A. All fittings, flanges and unions used in piping connections which include (but are not limited to) flanged, soldered, brazed, threaded, or welded joints, shall be marked to identify the manufacturer, the rating description, materials of construction, and service limitations per MSS SP-25. Components not stamped with the markings per this requirement will be rejected.
2.10 PLASTIC TUBING, HOSE AND FITTINGS
A. Nylon Reinforced:
1. Tube: Clear PVC.
2. Reinforcement: Nylon braid within tube wall.
3. Temperature: 25 to 150 degrees Fahrenheit.
4. Working pressure rating at 70 deg F:
a. ¾” and under: 150 psi, minimum.
b. 1” and 1-¼”: 100 psi, minimum.
c. 1-½” and 2”: 70 psi minimum.
5. Standards: NSF 51 listed food grade resin.
6. Ends: Socket or NPT by barb, polypropylene.
7. Clamps: SST.
8. Acceptable products: Finger Lakes BraidFlex 70N, Nalgene 980, Tygon B-44-4X, Thermoplastic Processes Excelon Braided, or equal as approved by the Engineer.
B. Non-reinforced, 1” ID and Smaller:
1. Clear flexible PVC.
2. Wall thickness as required to meet or exceed maximum system pressure at point of installation.
3. Acceptable products: Nalgene 180, Excelon RNT, Finger Lakes GP70 or equal as approved by the Engineer.
08/19/132047 40 20 20 - 16 Mechanical Piping
C. Vacuum Tubing, 1” ID and Smaller:
1. Clear flexible plastic with extra heavy wall thickness.
2. Rated for full vacuum, 29.9 in-Hg @ 73 deg F.
3. Acceptable products: Tygon R-3603, Nalgene 180 Vacuum, or equal as approved by the Engineer.
D. Barbed Tube Fittings, For 1” ID Tube and Smaller:
1. PVC, polypropylene, polyethylene, acetal, or nylon construction.
2. Multi-barb tube end and NPT end as required.
3. With all stainless steel or plastic hose clamps.
4. Acceptable products: Herco 700 series, Parker Hannifin TrueSeal, or equal as approved by the Engineer.
E. Braided Metal Hose:
1. Service: Cooling Water.
2. Seam welded annular corrugated metal hose.
3. Material: Bronze or stainless steel construction as shown on the drawings.
4. Ends: Flanged, threaded or plain as shown on the drawings.
5. Working pressure shall meet or exceed the system requirements.
6. Reinforcement: Single or double metal braid as required to meet the working pressure requirements.
7. Acceptable products: Metraflex, Hyspan, or equal as approved by the Engineer.
2.11 MANUFACTURED FITTINGS
A. Specialty Couplings: See Section 33 11 07 for the following coupling types:
1. Flexible Pipe Couplings.
2. Grooved Pipe Couplings.
3. Flanged Coupling Adapters.
4. Flexible Expansion Joints.
08/19/132047 40 20 20 - 17 Mechanical Piping
5. Flexible Ball-Type Expansion Joints.
B. Threaded Outlet: 3000 lb., materials same as pipe. Acceptable products: Grinnell Fig. 1812; Threaded Trans-O-Con, Phoenix Forging Co.; Bonney Forge Thred-O-let; or equal as approved by the Engineer.
C. Welding Outlet: Standard weight, materials same as pipe. Acceptable products: Grinnell, Fig. 1811; Bonney Forge Weldolet; or equal as approved by the Engineer.
D. Stub-end flanges and backing rings: Type 304L stainless steel. Acceptable products: Alaskan Copper Works Fig SK38P, or equal as approved by the Engineer.
E. Tube Fittings:
1. Compression Tube Fittings (Instrument Service): Double-ferrule type, brass or stainless steel as shown. Acceptable products: Swagelock Gageable Tube Fittings, Parker Hannifin A-Lok Tube Fittings, or equal as approved by the Engineer.
2. Flared 45 deg Tube Fittings (General Water Service): Brass per AWWA C800-05. Acceptable products: Mueller Co., AY McDonald Mfg., or equal as approved by the Engineer.
F. Unions:
1. PVC Unions:
a. SCH 80 PVC; socket by socket; Viton O-ring seals for all services except caustic (CA) and ammonia (NH). Use EPDM O-rings for CA and NH services.
b. Acceptable products: Spears Manufacturing Co., Ryan Herco, or equal as approved by the Engineer.
2. Transition Unions, 2-Inches and Smaller:
a. Socket SCH 80 PVC by FNPT brass union (substitute type 316 stainless steel where shown on the drawings), with EPDM O-ring seal.
b. Acceptable products: Spears Manufacturing Co., Ryan Herco, or equal as approved by the Engineer.
3. Dielectric Unions, 2-Inches and Smaller:
a. Rated 250 psi, socket end copper or FPT end brass to FPT end steel, steel nut with dielectric insulators and EPDM gasket; breakdown voltage of 600 volts, minimum.
08/19/132047 40 20 20 - 18 Mechanical Piping
b. Acceptable products: A.Y. McDonald Mfg, Wilkins, or equal as approved by the Engineer.
G. Transition Couplings, 2-Inches and Smaller:
1. Socket SCH 80 PVC by FNPT brass (substitute type 316 stainless steel where shown on the drawings), with EPDM O-ring seal.
2. Acceptable products: Spears Manufacturing Co., Ryan Herco or equal as approved by the Engineer.
H. Flange Insulation Sets: See Section 05 05 26.
2.12 MODULAR MECHANICAL SEALS
A. Size:
1. To match pipe shown on the drawings.
2. Contractor shall coordinate the size of the wall (or floor) opening, in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
3. When it is required to insert a flange through the penetration, size seal and penetration to accommodate.
B. EPDM synthetic rubber seal links with composite pressure plate and stainless steel hardware.
C. Designed to be leak tight with 20 psig static pressure.
D. Acceptable Products:
1. Thunderline Link-Seal, Model S-316 Series.
2. Proco Products Pen-Seal Series.
3. Metraflex Metraseal Type ES Series.
4. Or equal as approved by the Engineer.
2.13 STEEL WALL SLEEVE FOR MODULAR MECHANICAL SEAL
A. Carbon steel sleeve with 2-inch water stop collar at mid-point. OD to match the modular mechanical seal model and pipe size requirements. Thickness to match standard weight pipe. Length to match wall thickness. Water stop collar connected by a continuous weld bead on both sides. Fusion bonded lined and coated per Section 09 96 56.10.
B. Acceptable Products:
08/19/132047 40 20 20 - 19 Mechanical Piping
1. Thunderline Century-Line WS Series.
2. Proco Products Pen-Seal Wall Sleeve Series.
3. Metraflex Wall Sleeve.
4. Or equal as approved by the Engineer.
2.14 PIPE SUPPORT SYSTEMS
A. General:
1. All piping shall be supported as specified herein and as shown on the drawings. Manufacturer's catalog figure numbers are typical of the types and quality of standard pipe supports and hangers to be employed. Special support and hanger details are shown to cover typical locations where standard catalog supports are inapplicable.
2. All piping hangers, supports, rods, clamps, guides, and other hanger and support accessories shall be stainless steel unless otherwise shown or specified.
3. Horizontal piping larger than 2 inches: Pedestal type saddle with u-bolt in accordance with Standard Drawing 9944-GB, unless otherwise shown.
B. Hangers:
1. Clevis Type:
a. Materials: Carbon steel, hot dipped galvanized.
b. MSS SP 58, Type 1 or 6.
c. Acceptable products: Grinnell, Figure 104 or 260; B-Line, Figure B3198 or B3100; Piping Technologies and Products, PTP Figures 83, 89, 110;Tolco Figure 1; or equal as approved by the Engineer.
2. Hanger Rods, Clevises, Nuts, Sockets, and Turnbuckles: In accordance with MSS-SP-58.
3. Attachments:
a. I-Beam Clamp: Concentric load type, MSS SP 58, Type 21, 28, 29, or 30, which engage both sides of flange.
b. Concrete Inserts: MSS-SP-58, Type 18, continuous channel insert with load rating not less than that of hanger rod it supports.
c. Concrete Rod Attachment Plate: Steel plate with four-anchor ceiling attachment and rod U-lug. Acceptable products: Piping Technologies and
08/19/132047 40 20 20 - 20 Mechanical Piping
Products, PTP Fig. 73; Grinnell, Fig. 52; Bergen-Paterson, Part 1020-Type 1; Tolco Figure 35; or equal as approved by the Engineer.
C. Wall Brackets:
1. Material: carbon steel with galvanized finish, or stainless steel.
2. MSS SP-58, Type 31 light loading, Type 32 medium loading, or Type 33 heavy loading, as required.
3. Acceptable products: Anvil Figures 194, 195 or 199; Cooper B-Line Figures B3063, B3605 or B3607; Tolco Figures 30L, 30M 0r 30H, or equal as approved by the Engineer.
D. Pipe Riser Support:
1. Materials: Carbon steel. Provide stainless steel inside reservoirs as shown.
2. Coatings: hot-dipped galvanized. Provide PVC coating inside reservoirs as shown.
3. MSS-SP-58, Type 8.
4. Acceptable products: Piping Technologies and Products, PTP Figure 90; Grinnell figure 261 series, Tolco Figure 6, or equal as approved by the Engineer.
E. Pipe U-bolts:
1. Materials: Carbon steel, hot dipped galvanized or 316L stainless steel as shown.
2. MSS-SP-58 Type 24, standard loading, with single hex nuts on pipe side, dual hex nuts on opposite side, and washers both sides.
3. Acceptable products: Pipe Shields Inc, G Series; Tolco Figure 110; or equal as approved by the Engineer.
F. Anti-friction Pads:
1. Pads: All TFE construction, ¼” thickness, virgin grade. Etched one side for surface bonding.
2. Bonding Agent: High-temperature TFE bonding epoxy cement. 250 deg F temperature rating, minimum.
3. Acceptable products: Piping Technologies and Products; Tolco Figure 425; or equal as approved by the Engineer.
08/19/132047 40 20 20 - 21 Mechanical Piping
G. Channel Strut:
1. Materials: Type 316 stainless steel unless otherwise shown.
2. Channel Size: 12 gauge, 1-5/8" by 1-5/8", unless otherwise shown.
3. Members and Connections: Design for all loads with safety factor of 5.
4. Provide compatible stainless steel channel nuts, bolts, pipe clamps, brackets, and hardware as required.
5. Provide pipe clamp isolators as follows:
a. Flexible elastomer pipe clamp isolators that are preformed to the pipe OD for PVC and copper piping. Provide for other piping materials when isolator or cushion is shown on the drawings. Isolators cut from strip material are not acceptable. Acceptable products: Unistrut “Cush-a-clamp”, B-Line “BVT Series Vibraclamp”, Anvil “Cush-a-clamp” or equal as approved by the Engineer.
6. All exposed ends of metal framing system channels shall be provided with end caps.
7. Acceptable Products: Cooper B-Line B22SS6, Unistrut P1000SS or F1000, Anvil-Strut AS-200, or equal as approved by the Engineer.
H. Channel Strut Cantilever Bracket, Single Top Bolt: Horizontal 12 gauge 316stainless steel strut with integral vertical strut mount. Slot facing up. Top or top and bottom bolt hole(s). Length of 6”, 12”, 18” or 24” as required. Acceptable products:Cooper B-Line B196 and B198, Unistrut P2231 thru P2234, Anvil-Strut AS-661-T1, or equal as approved by the Engineer.
I. Channel Strut Cantilever Bracket, Top and Bottom Bolt: Horizontal 12 gauge 316 stainless steel strut with integral vertical strut mount. Slot facing up. Top or top and bottom bolt hole(s). Length of 6”, 12”, 18” or 24” as required. Acceptable products: Cooper B-Line B196 and B198, Unistrut P2944 thru P2947, Anvil-Strut AS-661-T1, or equal as approved by the Engineer.
J. Channel Strut Concrete Inserts:
1. Materials: Type 316 stainless steel.
2. Maximum Allowable Point and Uniform Load: 2,000 lbs.
3. Maximum Anchorage Spacing: 4-inches.
4. Embed Depth: 3-Inches.
08/19/132047 40 20 20 - 22 Mechanical Piping
5. Length as required.
6. Acceptable products: Unistrut Series P3249-3270, Cooper B-Line B22-I,series, Anvil-Strut, or equal as approved by the Engineer.
K. Sway Strut:
1. Adjustable length steel strut.
2. Three-bolt pipe clamp, MSS SP-58, Type-3.
3. Mounting brackets.
4. Acceptable products: Piping Technologies and Products; Anvil Fig. 640; Bergen-Paterson, Part 2250/6252; or equal as approved by the Engineer.
L. Concrete Anchors and Anchor Bolts: Section 05 50 00.
2.15 FACTORY FINISHING
A. In accordance with Section 33 10 01 and the “Finish, Coating and Color Schedule” as shown on Drawing 2117-Z-001.2
B. Holdbacks at field joints:
1. Cement-Mortar: As necessary for field weld.
2. Fusion-Bonded Epoxy: 6-inch from field weld joints.
2.16 MISCELLANEOUS COMPONENTS
A. Strainers and Filters: See Section 33 12 27.11.
B. Tape Wrap and Wax-Tape Wrap: See Section 33 10 01.
C. Bolt Thread Anti-Seize Compound: See Section 05 05 26.
D. Thread Sealants
1. For Stainless Steel Piping:
a. Suitable for operating pressures up to 10,000 psig.
b. NSF/ANSI 61 approved.
c. Acceptable products: Loctite® 565, Real-Tuff by Hercules, or equal as approved by the Engineer.
2. For Thermoplastic Piping: Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) thread tape.
08/19/132047 40 20 20 - 23 Mechanical Piping
E. Flange Gaskets: See Section 05 05 26.
F. PVC and CPVC Joint Sealers
1. Solvent-welded primer:
a. Per ASTM F-656.
b. NSF approved.
c. Acceptable products: IPS Corporation Product P-70, Cookson Company “E-Z Weld” Product 212, Oatey “Purple NSF”, or equal as approved by the Engineer.
2. Solvent cement:
a. Per ASTM F-493.
b. NSF approved.
c. Rated as industrial grade and specifically for chemical process applications.
d. Rated for all pipe classes and schedules through 12” diameter.
e. Heavy bodied, medium set time.
f. Acceptable products: IPS Corporation Product 724, IPEX XIRTEC 24, or equal as approved by the Engineer.
3. Thread sealing compound:
a. Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE).
b. Acceptable products: Whitlam Co. “Power Seal PTFE”, Hercules “Real-Tuff”, or equal as approved by the Engineer.
G. Pipe Insulation: See Section 33 12 28.11
H. Pipe Identification
1. Provide identification per Section 22 05 53.05, Pipe Identification.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Expense of re-witnessing failed hydrostatic tests or re-inspection of any phase of pipe manufacture shall be paid by the Contractor.
08/19/132047 40 20 20 - 24 Mechanical Piping
B. Expense of re-witnessing or re-inspection by the District's authorized agent shall be the total charge billed to the District by the agent.
3.2 SHOP FABRICATION
A. Tolerances:
1. Tolerances shall be per PFI Standard ES-3 and as follows:
a. Linear Dimensions (intermediate or overall), including: face-to-face, face-to-end, and end-to-end of straight piping; center-to-end or center-to-face of nozzles and other attachments; or center-to-face of bends. Tolerances are not accumulative.
1) Refer to Figure 1 in PFI ES-3 for illustration.
2) 10-inch and smaller: +/- 1/8-inch maximum
3) 12-inch thru 24-inch: +/- 3/16-inch maximum
4) 24-inch thru 36-inch: +/- ¼-inch maximum
5) Larger than 36-inch: _+/- ¼-inch plus +/- 1/16-inch for each 12-inches over 36-inch.
b. Angularity:
1) Refer to Figure 1 in PFI ES-3 for illustration.
2) Alignment of flange facings or pipe ends shall not deviate by more than 3/64-inch per foot or 1/32-inch total, whichever is greater.
3) End preparation for field buttwelds shall not shall not deviate by more than 1/32-inch per foot across the land for inert gas weld or 3/32-inch for other welds.
4) Rotation of flanges shall be 1/16-inch maximum.
B. Stainless Steel Piping
1. Larger than 2-inch pipe joints: Shop welded stainless steel pipe joints, including the entire heat-affected zone, shall be cleaned, de-scaled and passivated per ASTM A380 and A967. Both the exterior and interior of the joint shall be treated. Inaccessible interior joints, as approved by the Engineer, shall be omitted from this process
2. 2-inch and smaller pipe joints: Shop welded stainless steel pipe joints shall be passivated as above when called out on the drawings.
08/19/132047 40 20 20 - 25 Mechanical Piping
3.3 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Dimensions given on drawings are nominal. Allowances for gaskets and welds are not shown and shall be provided. Existing pipe spool lengths shall be verified prior to fabrication. The locations and elevations of connection points to existing pipes shall be verified prior to piping fabrication.
B. Tolerances:
1. Unless otherwise noted, the pipe installation tolerances shall be:
a. Process Pipe:
b. Plumb: +/- 3/64-inch/foot maximum from vertical.
c. Level: +/- 3/64-inch/foot maximum from either level or the designed slope when a slope is required.
d. Elevation: +/- 01/8-inch maximum from the design elevation.
2. Prior to bolt-up, flanges shall be parallel within 1/16-inch/foot measured across any diameter and the bolt holes shall be aligned within 1/8-inch maximum offset.
C. Clean out fittings, valves, and pipe sections before installing.
D. Make up welded steel flanged joints as shown on Standard Drawing 323-EA,324-EA, or 325-EA as appropriate. Remove all traces of protective coatings, dirt or other foreign material from both flange faces before final assembly.
E. Furnish and assemble pipe and fittings to provide accurate alignment for joints:
1. Make joints watertight.
2. Use an anti-seize compound on all bolt threads. Follow manufacturer's instructions for application.
F. Provide temporary watertight plugs or bulkheads for closure of the open ends of piping when pipe-laying operations are not in progress, to prevent the entry of rodents or other contaminants.
G. Pipes and fittings shall be free from tool marks.
H. Field measure, fit, and secure piping without forcing or springing. Flanged pipe spools shall be re-fabricated as required for proper fit-up.
I. Piping connections shall not impart stress or strain to equipment.
08/19/132047 40 20 20 - 26 Mechanical Piping
J. The use of spacers between flanges for the purpose of correcting pipe spool length errors shall not be permitted. The appropriate pipe spool, as approved by the Engineer, shall be re-fabricated or replaced as required to provide direct flange fit-upwithout the use of spacers.
K. No punched strap, wire, or other makeshift devices will be accepted.
L. Joints and Connections: Cut piping and tubing square. Remove rough edges and burrs from both the outside and inside edges and ream to original diameter.
M. Unless otherwise shown, install piping parallel to walls and structures neatly both as to workmanship and grouping.
N. Run pipes in the approximate locations and sized as shown on the drawings. Offset piping wherever necessary to obtain headroom and as approved by the Engineer.
O. Caulk watertight around pipes passing through walls.
P. Changes in sizes of piping shall be made with reducing fittings wherever they occur. Unless otherwise shown, the use of bushings will not be permitted. Use eccentric reducing fittings where necessary to provide free drainage of lines.
Q. Pipe and Tube Bending: Pipe and tubing bend radius shall conform to PFI Standard ES-24 and SAE-SA33611. The preferred bend radius is 4D, or 4 times the tube nominal diameter. The minimum bend radius shall be 3D. Bends of a smaller radius than 3D shall be pre-approved by the Engineer. Bends shall be smooth and accurate without significant kinking, wrinkling or flattening of the tube. Wrinkle depth on the inside radius of the bend shall not exceed 2 percent of the tube OD. Scratches in the bend shall not exceed 10 percent of the tube wall thickness. The type of bending tool or bending machine used shall be approved for the material type, size and wall thickness of the tube to be bent.
R. High and Low Points: Do not route piping in such a manner that high points and low points are created, except as approved by the Engineer. Refer to article 3.3.C. for exposed piping vent and drain requirements.
S. Threaded Joints:
1. Conform to ASME B1.20.1.
2. Produce sufficient thread length to ensure full engagement when screwed home in fittings.
3. Countersink pipe ends, ream and clean chips and burrs after threading.
4. Make connections with not more than three threads exposed.
5. Lubricate male threads with Teflon tape (except stainless steel piping).
08/19/132047 40 20 20 - 27 Mechanical Piping
6. Apply thread sealant on stainless steel piping.
7. Cutting oils used for threaded piping shall be NSF61 certified, or food-grade when the piping is in contact with drinking water.
T. Modular Mechanical Seals:
1. When modular mechanical seals are required, the Contractor shall determine the appropriate wall or floor opening size suitable for the selected seal. When it is required to insert a flange through the penetration, the seal and penetration shall be sized to accommodate.
2. Seal bolt heads shall face toward the structure interior.
3. Buried Service: Seal annular space around pipe on buried side of seal with polyurethane sealant.
4. See typical detail TM030 for additional installation requirements.
U. Hydraulic Instrumentation and Control Tubing:
1. Do not scratch outside surface of tubing.
2. Deburr tube ends before installing connector.
3. Install connectors per manufacturer’s instructions.
4. Install instrumentation tubing to such a slope as to be self-venting of air.
V. Copper Tubing:
1. Cutting in or swaging and expanding copper joints will not be tolerated.
2. Install pre-formed elastomeric insulating cushions between copper pipe and pipe support clamps.
3. Compression Joints – prepare tubing ends per fitting manufacturer’s written instructions.
4. Flared fitting joints for general water service: Flare tubing end at 45 degrees with approved flaring tool.
W. PVC and CPVC Piping:
1. All Contractor’s personnel installing PVC and CPVC pipe materials shall be trained and certified by the PVC pipe/fitting manufacturer’s representative.
2. All pipe and fittings shall be handled, stored, and inspected in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations.
08/19/132047 40 20 20 - 28 Mechanical Piping
3. All pipe and fittings shall be stored out of direct sunlight and away from heat prior to installation. Covering with only a tarpaulin is not acceptable.
4. All piping shall be cut, made up, and installed in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations, ASTM D 2855, and this Section.
5. All burrs shall be removed and all shavings cleaned from inside of the pipe prior to joining.
6. Use strap wrench for tightening threaded plastic joints. Do not over-tighten fittings.
7. Install plastic pipe and tubing to permit contraction and expansion from temperature changes without damage.
8. Minimize the use of threaded joints in plastic piping systems.
9. Do not install pipe when ambient temperatures are below 40 degrees F, nor above 90 degrees F when exposed to direct sunlight. Shield ends to be joined from direct sunlight prior to and during joining.
10. Provide adequate ventilation when working with pipe solvent cements.
11. Use flange or transition union connections when transitioning from PVC or CPVC piping to metallic piping whenever possible (whether shown on the drawings or not). Use transition couplings where flanges or transition unions are not practical. Use PVC or CPVC male threaded adapters where threaded connections are required.
12. Flange nuts shall be torqued in accordance with the gasket manufacturer's recommendations. Do not over-torque gasketed flanges.
13. Outdoor exposed plastic piping shall be coated with a white urethane UV topcoat per Section 09 96 56.05, High Build Epoxy Coatings.
14. All Contractor’s personnel installing PVC and CPVC pipe materials shall be trained and certified by the PVC pipe/fitting manufacturer’s representative.
15. Install pre-formed elastomeric insulating cushions between plastic pipe and pipe support clamps.
X. Braided Metal Hose:
1. Install per manufacturers instructions.
2. Install without offset, tension, compression or torque applied to hose.
08/19/132047 40 20 20 - 29 Mechanical Piping
3. Install with the axis of the hose at a right angle to the any motion at the point of connection.
4. Install support for hose at the end of the hose length.
5. When bends are required, the bend shall not be smaller than the minimum bend radius required by the manufacturer.
Y. Stainless Steel Piping
1. Larger than 2-inch pipe joints: Field welded stainless steel pipe joints, including the entire heat-affected zone, shall be cleaned, de-scaled and passivated per ASTM A380 and A967. Both the exterior and interior of the joint shall be treated. Inaccessible interior joints, as approved by the Engineer, shall be omitted from this process
2. 2-inch and smaller pipe joints: Field welded stainless steel pipe joints shall be passivated as above when called out on the drawings.
3.4 INSTALLATION - EXPOSED PIPING
A. Unions:
1. Provide at each piping connection to equipment or instrument (whether shown on the drawings or not) on equipment or instrument side of each isolation valve to facilitate installation and removal.
2. At each valved header tap, provide a union after the tap valve.
3. Some isolation valves have integral unions in which case additional unions are not required.
B. Piping Clearances (unless otherwise shown):
1. Do not route piping in front of, or to interfere with access ways, ladders, stairs, platforms, walkways, openings, doors, hatches, or windows.
2. Do not route piping over, around, in front of, or in back of electrical equipment including controls, panels, switches, terminals, boxes, or other similar electrical work.
3. Cutouts for pipe penetrating through grating shall be in accordance with the following:
a. Grating cutout diameter:
PIPE NOMINAL SIZE GRATING CUTOUT DIAMETER
08/19/132047 40 20 20 - 30 Mechanical Piping
¾” through 3” 1” larger than Pipe Nominal Size
4” through 8” 2” larger than Pipe Nominal Size
b. A group of pipes that penetrate through grating at a wall surface may have a continuous cutout that is parallel to the wall surface provided that at no point shall the gap between pipe and grating exceed 2-inch.
c. Provide banding where called out on the drawings. Banding shall be securely fashioned, free from burrs or rough edges, and of material similar to the grating.
C. Vents and Drains: Provide ½” vent taps at all high points and ¾” drain taps at all low points. Taps shall include a threaded ball valve for isolation. Valves shall be of the appropriate material and pressure rating. Steel taps shall be per TM002; stainless steel shall be similar. Copper and PVC taps shall use reducing tees.
3.5 INSTALLATION - BURIED PIPE
A. Joints: Do not encase joints in concrete unless specifically shown, or approved in writing by the Engineer.
B. General Placement:
1. In accordance with Section 31 23 16 and as shown on the drawings.
2. Keep trench dry until pipe laying and joining is complete.
3. Excavate trench bottom and sides of ample dimensions to permit visual inspection and testing of entire pipeline.
4. Close and block open end of last laid pipe section when placement operations are not in progress and at close of day's work.
5. Prevent uplift and floating of pipe prior to backfilling.
C. PVC Pipe Placement:
1. Lay pipe snaking from one side of trench to other.
2. Offset: As recommended by manufacturer for maximum temperature variation between time of solvent welding and during operation.
3. Fill with cold water 30 minutes before backfilling.
4. Install tracer wire and marker tape per Section 33 12 28.11.
08/19/132047 40 20 20 - 31 Mechanical Piping
D. Pipe depth:
1. Pipes within plant site shall have 42” of cover, minimum.
2. Pipes that extend beyond the plant site to “cross country” shall have 48” of cover, minimum.
3. In cases where the pipes must be shallower than the minimum due to interference issues or when called out on the drawings as shallow, a concrete cap shall be provided per TC108.
E. Tape Wrap: All embedded and buried stainless steel, bronze and brass piping, and copper fittings, shall be wrapped with 10 mil PVC tape with a 50 percent overlap, unless otherwise noted.
3.6 PIPE SUPPORT SYSTEMS
A. No attempt has been made to show all required pipe supports in all locations on the drawings. The absence of pipe supports and details on any drawing shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for providing them in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's written recommendations and these specifications.
B. Provide special pipe supports where shown.
C. General support spacing shall be at maximum distances as listed below (unless otherwise shown):
TYPE OF PIPE 1" SIZE AND SMALLER
1-1/4" SIZE AND LARGER
Steel, Stainless Steel, Brass
6' - 0" 10' - 0"
Copper Tubing 5' - 0" 8' - 0"
PVC, CPVC 3' - 0" 5' - 0"
D. Provide at least one pipe support at each change of direction of the pipe.
E. Provide additional pipe supports directly adjacent to valves and other operating devices so that piping does not move when the valve or device is operated.
F. Decrease spacing as necessary to prevent sagging and vibration.
G. Provide a minimum of two anchor bolts on each channel support attached to concrete.
08/19/132047 40 20 20 - 32 Mechanical Piping
3.7 BOLTING APPLICATION SCHEDULE
A. Unless otherwise noted or shown, all bolting shall be in accordance with Section 05 05 26 and shall be applied according to the following:
BOLT TYPE APPLICATION
Stainless Steel All chemical services
All piping inside vaults, basins, tanks and vessels
All submerged* services
Galvanized steel All other applications
* Submerged is defined herein to mean any portion of the bolted system that can periodically become wetted during operation by the process fluid or ground water.
3.8 NATIONAL ELECTRIC CODE GROUNDING
A. The National Electric Code requires grounding of water piping systems. In order to ensure grounding of bolted flange joints with fusion bonded epoxy or hi-build epoxy coatings the coating under two nuts per flange (four nuts per joint) shall be removed by grinding and special stainless steel lock washers shall be used for these nuts/bolts. After completion of each bolted flange the electrical continuity shall be checked with a volt/ohm meter. Also, when the pipe system has been completed the electrical continuity of the entire pipe system shall be similarly checked.
3.9 CLEANING
A. Liquid Piping Systems:
1. Following assembly, but prior to testing, flush all piping with water at minimum flushing velocities of 2.5 fpm until all foreign matter is removed.
2. If in the opinion of the Engineer flushing large diameter pipe at 2.5 fpm flushing velocity is impractical, clean the piping in-place by other means and then flush the line at lower flushing velocities. The Engineer shall approve all cleaning procedures prior to implementation.
3. Insert cone strainers in flushing connections to attached equipment and leave in-place until cleaning is complete.
4. Remove accumulated debris through drains, or by removing spools or valves from piping as necessary.
08/19/132047 40 20 20 - 33 Mechanical Piping
B. Gaseous Piping Systems:
1. Blow piping clean using oil free air compressor with dryer. Air shall be dried to a maximum dew point of 40 degrees F.
2. Natural Gas Systems: Purge with nitrogen prior to admitting natural gas.
3.10 DISINFECTION
A. After cleaning but prior to operation, disinfect potable water piping and other piping systems as directed by the Engineer.
B. Disinfection procedures shall be in accordance with AWWA C653-03.
C. Swab or spray the interior of all final connections (piping, fittings and valves) with 1percent hypochlorite solution.
3.11 FIELD FINISHING
A. Notify Engineer at least 3 working days prior to start of any surface preparation or coating application work.
B. See Section 33 10 01 for additional requirements.
C. Fusion-Bonded Epoxy Lining/Coating at Field Joints:
1. Grind lining/coating holdback area at field joints to near-white metal after field joint is made.
2. Abrade lining/coating 6" back from holdback edge to provide adhesion surface for high-build epoxy.
3. Apply high-build epoxy to holdback and abraded areas.
D. Cement-Mortar Linings/Coatings:
1. General:
a. Completed pipeline shall have a sound, continuous, and unbroken coating of reinforced cement mortar.
b. All field girth joints and fittings shall be coated.
c. Damaged original coating shall be repaired.
d. Clean all surfaces to assure adhesion of mortar.
2. Field Joints:
08/19/132047 40 20 20 - 34 Mechanical Piping
a. Coat after completion and inspection, testing, and District approvals.
b. Do not apply mortar against hot welds.
c. Field applied mortar coating shall be reinforced with self-furring welded wire fabric tack welded to the steel cylinder.
E. Field Finish: Coating of all piping shall be the system and color as designated on the “Finish Coating and Color Schedule” on Drawing Z-001.2.
3.12 TESTING - GENERAL
A. All piping shall be tested in accordance with these specifications.
B. Functional tests shall consist of leakage tests as specified below. See Section 01 75 17 for additional requirements.
C. Provide all personnel, equipment and materials as required to complete the testing. Equipment and materials might include: pumps, hoses, pressure gauges, nitrogen tanks, leakage measuring device, connections, relief valves, and other necessary apparatus.
D. Testing Gauges:
1. Scale: Register pressure in pounds per square inch gauge (psig).
2. Accuracy: ANSI Grade 3A ( 0.25 percent).
3. Range: From 0 psig to 1.5 times the test pressure. The gauge face shall have a 5 psig increment inscribed.
4. The test gauge assembly shall be equipped with a 1/2" quick connect fitting and isolation valve to allow the Engineer to install a second gauge and a pressure monitoring device.
5. Calibration: The gauge shall be calibrated within 45 days prior to the test and the calibration tag affixed to the gauge. District may test pressure gauges for accuracy.
E. Notification: In addition to the submitted testing schedule, notify the Engineer in writing a minimum of 7 days in advance of filling or testing a section of piping. All tests shall be performed in the presence of the Engineer.
F. All testing shall be completed prior to backfill of any portion of the test segment.
08/19/132047 40 20 20 - 35 Mechanical Piping
G. Preparation:
1. All valves and other appurtenances shall be installed and tested concurrentlyunless otherwise noted or shown. Remove or suitably isolate appurtenantinstruments or devices that could be damaged by pressure testing.
2. All pipe supports shall be completely installed and approved by the Districtprior to testing.
3. All pipe lining shall be completed, and interior of the pipeline shall bethoroughly cleaned prior to testing.
4. Testing shall not be performed against closed valves except where priorapproval has been granted, in writing, by the Engineer.
H. Filling the Pipeline for Hydrostatic Pressure Testing:
1. All air vents shall be open during the filling of the pipeline with water. After atest section is completely filled, close all air vents.
2. Filling Velocities: 1/4 feet per second, applied over full area of pipe.
3. After filling the pipe, the filling apparatus shall be either disconnected orphysically isolated from the pipeline.
4. Mortar lined pipe sections shall be allowed to stand under pressure for aminimum of 24 hours, to allow the lining to absorb water and permit theescape of air.
5. Examine valves and exposed connections for leaks during this period. Repairall visible or known leaks.
3.13 HYDROSTATIC TEST FOR PRESSURE PIPING
A. Test Pressure: As shown on the MECHANICAL PIPING SCHEDULE, located at the end of this section.
B. Test Procedure: Testing shall be per PFI ES-4 and as follows:
1. Raise the pipeline pressure to the initial test pressure by means of a pumpconnected to the pipe in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer.
2. Test Duration: 30 minutes, minimum, and for such additional time as necessaryto conduct examinations for leakage. Maintain test pressures constantthroughout the duration of the test.
3. While pipe is under pressure, the Contractor shall examine the pipeline forleakage in the presence of the Engineer.
08/19/13 2047 40 20 20 - 36 Mechanical Piping
4. Repair all leaks and retest the pipe. Retest the pipeline as many times asnecessary until all leaks have been corrected.
5. Any damage to the protective lining and coating of the pipe and to the caulkingor jointing material after the testing shall be repaired.
6. Repairs shall be made subject to the approval of the Engineer.
7. Leave pipe full of water unless otherwise directed by the Engineer.
8. Submit the completed “Piping Pressure Test Record” form for approval by theEngineer.
3.14 HYDROSTATIC TEST FOR GRAVITY PIPING
A. Test Preparation: Install inflatable test plug or other device to suitably isolate pipeline segment to be tested. Seal all openings to prevent evaporation.
B. Test Pressure: 10 feet of water at the highest point. Install temporary standpipes as necessary to achieve test pressures.
C. Test Duration: 30 minutes, minimum (unless otherwise noted), and for such additional time as necessary to conduct examinations for leakage.
D. Test Procedure:
1. While test segment is under pressure, the Contractor shall examine the pipingfor leakage in the presence of the Engineer. The test segment shall show nosigns of leakage.
2. Levels in standpipes used for testing shall remain constant throughout theduration of testing. Refilling or topping-off the test segments during the test isnot acceptable.
3. Repair all leaks and retest the pipe. The piping shall be retested as many timesas necessary until all leaks have been corrected.
4. Submit the completed “Piping Pressure Test Record” form for approval by theEngineer.
3.15 PNEUMATIC TESTS
A. General:
1. The Contractor shall recognize the potential hazards associated with pneumatictesting and shall take all necessary precautions to protect personnel.
08/19/13 2047 40 20 20 - 37 Mechanical Piping
2. The District reserves the right to perform additional non-destructive tests onany weld at any time at District expense. Contractor shall make allowance inthe schedule for a minimum of ½ day per test for additional District testing.
3. Pneumatic tests shall not be conducted on thermal plastic piping.
B. Testing Media: Oil free air compressor with dryer. Air shall be dried to a maximum dew point of 40 degrees F.
C. Test Pressure: As shown on the MECHANICAL PIPING SCHEDULE and as specified herein.
D. Tests for Saddle Type Branch Connections:
1. Test verifies the integrity of the branch connection welds by pressurizing thespaces between the saddle and the large pipe. Test shall be in accordance withAWWA C206-03 and as specified herein.
2. Test Connections: Two connections on each branch connection saddle; installtesting gauge on one connection and apply test air to the other connection.
3. Test Pressure: 25 psig.
E. Test Procedures:
1. Apply test air and slowly increase to testing pressure.
2. Test Pressures above 25 psig:
a. Conduct a preliminary leak test at 25 psig as a means of detecting majorleaks. Examine the entire pipe segment by means of soap solution.
b. After all leakage has been repaired and retested at the preliminary testpressures, gradually increase the test pressures to no more than ½ themaximum test pressure and re-inspect the test segment for leakage.
c. After all leakage has been repaired and retested at ½ the maximum testpressure, increase the test pressures in 10 percent of maximum testpressure increments until the maximum test pressures are achieved.Monitor the piping for leakage at each pressure increment.
3. The maximum test pressure shall be held continuously for a minimum time of15 minutes and for such additional time as may be necessary to conductexaminations for leakage.
4. Examine the piping for leakage by means of a soap solution applied at all jointsand connections. The piping shall show no soap bubbles or other evidence ofleakage.
08/19/13 2047 40 20 20 - 38 Mechanical Piping
5. Repair all leaks and retest the pipe. The pipeline shall be retested as manytimes as necessary until all leaks have been corrected.
6. Submit the completed “Piping Pressure Test Record” form for approval by theEngineer.
3.16 MAGNETIC PARTICLE TEST
A. Perform magnetic particle test per Section 05 05 24, Pipe Welding.
1. Submit the completed “Piping Pressure Test Record” form for approval by theEngineer.
3.17 ACCESSORIES
A. Install ID markers on exposed piping per section 22 05 53.05.
3.18 SUPPLEMENTS
A. The following supplements follow END OF SECTION are a part of this specification:
1. MECHANICAL PIPING SCHEDULE
2. MECHANICAL PIPING PRESSURE TEST RECORD
END OF SECTION
08/19/13 2047 40 20 20 - 39 Mechanical Piping
ME
CH
AN
ICA
L P
IPIN
G S
CH
ED
UL
E(3)
Syst
em
Cod
eSy
stem
Nam
eSe
rvic
eD
escr
iptio
nPi
pe S
izes
Pipe
M
ater
ials
(1)
Ope
ratin
g Pr
essu
re
(psi
g)
Tes
tPr
essu
re /
Typ
e(2
)N
otes
TWS
Trea
ted
Wat
er S
yste
mR
eser
voir
valv
e pi
t24
” ST
L13
P /1
50
TWS
Trea
ted
Wat
er S
yste
mPl
ant p
ump
suct
ion
36”
STL
13P
/ 150
TWS
Trea
ted
Wat
er S
yste
mPl
ant p
ump
disc
harg
e10
” to
36”
STL
220
P /2
65
TWS
Trea
ted
Wat
er S
yste
mPl
umbi
ng2”
and
smal
ler
CU
75- 1
50P
/ 225
CW
SC
oolin
g W
ater
Sys
tem
Supp
ly to
and
dis
char
ge fr
omTE
WA
C m
otor
s2½
” an
d sm
alle
rC
U13
- 85
P/ 1
50
CW
SC
oolin
g W
ater
Sys
tem
Supp
ly to
and
dis
char
ge fr
om
prec
isio
n ai
r han
dlin
g un
its.
1½”
and
smal
ler
CU
150
P / 2
25
DR
ND
rain
Dra
in, w
aste
and
ven
t pip
ing
6” a
nd
smal
ler
PVC
DW
V10
ft10
ft m
in./
HG
(1)
PIPE
MA
TER
IALS
:B
RS:
Bra
ssM
L&PC
S:M
orta
r Lin
ed &
Pla
stic
Coa
ted
Stee
lC
I:C
ast I
ron
Soil
Pipe
(Sec
tion
22 1
3 16
)PV
C:
Poly
viny
l Chl
orid
eC
U:
Cop
per
PVC
DW
V:
Poly
viny
l Chl
orid
e D
rain
Was
te V
ent (
Sect
ion
2213
16)
GST
:G
alva
nize
d St
eel
SST:
Stai
nles
s Ste
elM
L&C
S:M
orta
r Lin
ed &
Coa
ted
Stee
lSS
E:St
ainl
ess S
teel
Inst
rum
ent T
ubin
gM
L&D
CS:
Mor
tar L
ined
& D
iele
ctric
Coa
ted
Stee
l(2
)Te
st T
ypes
: H:
HG
: P:M
P:
Hyd
rost
atic
for p
ress
ure
pipi
ng.
Hyd
rost
atic
for g
ravi
ty p
ipin
g.Pn
eum
atic
Mag
netic
Par
ticle
(3)
Larg
e un
derg
roun
d pr
essu
re w
ater
pip
ing
is g
ener
ally
con
side
red
to b
e ci
vil p
ipin
g.Th
e te
stin
g of
ten
invo
lves
ove
rlaps
betw
een
mec
hani
cal
and
civi
l pip
ing.
Ref
er to
sect
ion
33 1
1 13
.05
“Ins
talla
tion
of S
teel
Pip
e” fo
r rel
ated
civ
il te
st p
roce
dure
s and
pre
ssur
es.
08/1
9/13
20
4740
20
20 -
4M
echa
nica
l Pip
ing
MECHANICAL PIPING PRESSURE TEST RECORDREFER TO SPEC 40 20 20 – MECHANICAL PIPING SCHEDULE
SPEC NUMBER: TEST NUMBER: DATE:
PROJECT NAME:
TEST INFORMATION SYSTEM CODE & SERVICE DESCRIPTION:
DESCRIPTION OF TEST BOUNDARIES: (Attach Sketch Showing the Boundaries on the related P&ID)
OPERATING PRESSURE (PSIG) OR FT: TEST PRESSURE (PSIG) OR (FT):
TEST METHOD: (CIRCLE ONE)
• HYDROSTATIC PRESSURE • HYDROSTATIC GRAVITY • PNEUMATIC •
PIPE SIZE: PIPE MATERIAL:
TEST REQUIREMENTS REQUIRED TEST PRESSURE: REQUIRED TEST DURATION:
GAUGE PRESSURE CALCULATIONELEVATION DIFFERENCE BETWEEN TEST GAUGE AND HIGH POINT (FT): X 0.434 (CONVERSION FACTOR) = + REQUIRED TEST PRESSURE (PSIG) = EQUALS REQUIRED GAUGE PRESSURE (PSIG) = TEST RESULTSTEST DATE: START TIME: • AM • PM • AMBIENT START TEMP (DEG F):ACTUAL GAUGE PRESSURE @ START (PSIG): FINISH TIME: • AM • PM • AMBIENT FINISH TEMP (DEG F):ACTUAL GAUGE PRESSURE @ FINISH (PSIG): TEST EQUIPMENT (SUBMIT CALIBRATIONS SEPARATELY)TYPE: ID#: LAST CAL. DATE: CAL. DUE: REMARKS: TEST ACCEPTANCECONTRACTOR WITNESS SIGNATURE: DATE:
EBMUD INSPECTOR WITNESS SIGNATURE: DATE:
08/19/13 2047 40 20 20 - 4 Mechanical Piping
SECTION 40 42 13.10
PROCESS PIPING THERMAL INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Section Includes: Insulation for piping and related systems.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 01 75 17 – Field Testing and Startup.
2. Section 09 91 00 – Painting.
3. Section 22 05 53.05 – Pipe Identification.
4. Section 22 30 00.01 – Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment.
5. Section 33 12 01 – Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods.
6. Section 40 20 20 – Mechanical Piping.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. A 53 - Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-dipped, Zinc-Coated,Welded and Seamless.
2. C 168 - Terminology Relating to Thermal Insulating Materials.
3. C 177 - Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and ThermalTransmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus.
4. C 335 - Test Method for Steady-state Heat Transfer Properties of HorizontalPipe Insulation.
5. C 518 - Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and ThermalTransmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus.
6. C 533 - Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation.
7. C 534 - Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular ThermalInsulation in Sheet and Tubular Form.
8. C 547 - Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation.
08/19/13 2047 40 42 13.10 - 1 Process Piping Thermal Insulation
9. C 552 - Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation.
10. C 585 - Practice for Inner and Outer Diameters of Rigid Thermal Insulation forNominal Sizes of Pipe and Tubing (NPS System).
11. C 591 - Specification for Unfaced Preformed Rigid Cellular PolyisocyanurateThermal Insulation.
12. C 795 - Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact with AusteniticStainless Steel.
13. C 929 - Practice for Handling, Transporting, Shipping, Storage, Receiving andApplication of Thermal Insulation Materials for Use in Contact with AusteniticStainless Steel.
14. C 1136 - Specification for Flexible, Low Permeance Vapor Retarders forThermal Insulation.
15. D 2310 - Classification of Machine-Made "Fiberglass" (Glass-Fiber-Reinforced-Thermosetting-Resin) Pipe.
16. E 84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
17. E 96 - Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Concealed: Piping above suspended ceilings and within walls, partitions, shafts, or service spaces and spaces not normally exposed to view but not buried.
B. Buried: Piping that is installed below buildings, foundations or finish grade, either in soil or encased in concrete in soil.
C. Exposed: Piping that is not concealed or buried.
D. K Factor: Thermal conductivity determined in accordance with ASTM C 177 or C 518 and expressed in units of [Btu-inch]/[hour-feet2- degrees Fahrenheit].
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Insulation Properties: Include K factor, thickness, density, operatingtemperature limits, tensile strength, compressive strength, moisture absorption,flame spread and smoke developed in accordance with ASTM E 84 andcorrosivity to stainless steel piping in accordance with ASTM C 795.
08/19/13 2047 40 42 13.10 - 2 Process Piping Thermal Insulation
2. Jacket Properties: Include covering material, cover thickness, tensile strength,tear strength, permeability per ASTM E 96, flame spread and smoke developedin accordance with ASTM E 84, closure type or devices, and accessories.
B. Manufacturer's Application Instructions: Include assembly and application drawings and detailed instructions.
C. Laboratory Report: Provide certified laboratory report that insulation is not manufactured using chlorinated polymers and does not contain chloride, bromides, sulfates, or fire-retardant materials.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: In accordance with California Title 24.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store insulation materials under cover and protected from moisture.
B. Handle and store insulation for use on stainless steel in accordance with ASTM C 929.
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. As specified in Section 33 12 01.
1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Test piping and heat tracing and obtain acceptance of piping and heat tracing by Engineer prior to applying insulation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE INSULATION, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Insulation Thicknesses: Provide insulation thickness in inches in accordance with the following table:
08/19/13 2047 40 42 13.10 - 3 Process Piping Thermal Insulation
THERMAL PIPING INSULATION THICKNESSES
Service Temperature
Nominal Pipe Diameters
1 inch and less
1.25 to2 inch
2.5 to 4 inch
5 to10 inch
Over10 inch
105 to 200 degrees Fahrenheit 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.0 2.5
40 to 104 degrees Fahrenheit 0.5 1.0 1.0 1.5 2.0
Below 40 degrees Fahrenheit 1.0 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.0
B. Insulation Types: Provide in accordance the drawings and with the Piping Insulation Schedule below.
C. Heat Tracing as required by the specifications and drawings.
2.2 PIPE INSULATION
A. Insulation, Type 1:
1. Insulation Material: Closed cell elastomeric insulation. Tubular form for pipesizes 6-inch and under and sheet form for pipe sizes 8-inch and larger.
2. Temperature Range: Minus 70 degrees Fahrenheit to plus 220 degreesFahrenheit.
3. Thermal conductivity, K Factor at 75 Degrees Fahrenheit: 0.27 or better.
4. Water Vapor Permeability: 0.10 perm-inch or better.
5. ASTM E84 Fire Ratings: 25 or less flame spread index, 50 or less smokedeveloped index.
6. Meets or exceeds: UL181 Mold growth.
7. Maximum Moisture Absorption: 0.2 percent by volume.
8. Joints: Seal with adhesive to form continuous water barrier.
9. Acceptable Products: Armacell AP Armaflex, Nomaco K-flex Flex-Therm, orequal as approved by the Engineer.
B. Insulation, Type 7, Preinsulated Copper Piping:
08/19/13 2047 40 42 13.10 - 4 Process Piping Thermal Insulation
1. Service Pipe: 20 foot lengths of Type K copper pipe suitable for water atpressures up to 150 pounds per square inch gauge and temperatures to 250degrees Fahrenheit.
2. Insulation: Factory applied polyurethane foam; k factor of 0.14 or less at 70degrees Fahrenheit, average density of 2.0 to 3.0 pounds per cubic foot,suitable for service temperatures up to 250 degrees Fahrenheit.
3. Insulation Cover: Polyvinyl chloride cover pipe; thicknesses in inches to be0.07 for up to 3.5 inch cover pipe diameter, 0.12 for 4 inch to 6 inch and 0.20for 6 inch cover pipe diameter.
4. Field Joints: Slip on bronze coupling with molded high temperature EPDMsealing rings in grooves, set to compensate for expansion and contraction;lubricated with non-toxic lubricant; insulation sealed with compression rubberend seals.
5. Thermal Expansion: Provide design and materials for expansion via slip-onjoint, loops, expansion ells and other fittings as required to accommodateservice pipe thermal expansion, contraction and thrust based on ambient andoperating conditions as specified in the Piping Schedule or as indicated on theDrawings; if not otherwise specified, design for 40 degrees Fahrenheit ambientand 200 degrees Fahrenheit service temperature.
6. Acceptable Products: Thermal Pipe Systems Inc. Copper-Core, Pipe ShieldsInc., or equal as approved by the Engineer.
7. Thrust Blocks and Fittings: Provide design and materials for thrust blocks andanchor fittings at every change in direction.
8. Acceptable Products: Thermal Pipe Systems Inc. Super Temp-Tite, PipeShields Inc., or equal as approved by the Engineer.
2.3 VAPOR BARRIERS
A. Vapor Barrier, Type 1:
1. Material: White kraft paper bound to aluminum foil meeting ASTM C 1136,Type I.
2. Permeability: 0.02 perm or lower.
3. Maximum Flame Spread Rating: 25.
4. Edge Seal: Pressure sensitive tape lap seal.
5. Circumferential Joints: 4 inch wide tape or similar properties or 4 inch wideoverlap with adhesive seal.
08/19/13 2047 40 42 13.10 - 5 Process Piping Thermal Insulation
6. Acceptable Products: Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp. all service jackets withDoublesure adhesive lap seal, Schuller Micro-Lok AP-T Plus, or equal asapproved by the Engineer.
2.4 INSULATION JACKETS
A. Jacket, Type 3:
1. Material: Ultraviolet resistant polyvinyl chloride jacketing, 20 mil minimumthickness.
2. System temperature range: 45 deg F to 150 deg F.
3. ASTM E84 Fire Ratings: 25 or less flame spread index, 50 or less smokedeveloped index.
4. Color: White.
5. Overlap: One inch minimum at joints and fittings.
6. Joint Seal: PVC solvent welded or adhesive as recommended by themanufacturer.
7. Fitting Covers: Factory made with full thickness insulation.
8. Acceptable Products: Johns Manville Zeston 2000 PVC, or equal as approvedby the Engineer.
2.5 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Cover Adhesive: Premium adhesive as recommended by the insulation cover supplier for heavy duty service in corrosive, wet environments. Standard duty adhesives are not permitted.
B. Vapor Seal Mastic and Weatherproof Coating:
1. Acceptable Products: Benjamin Foster, No. 30-76, Insul-Coustic, No. I.C.-580,or equal as approved by the Engineer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Prior to installing insulation, verify that tests of piping systems have been performed at the pressures specified in the Mechanical Piping Schedule in section 40 20 20.
B. Verify that piping surfaces are dry and free of loose scale, rust, dirt, oil, or water prior to applying insulation.
08/19/13 2047 40 42 13.10 - 6 Process Piping Thermal Insulation
C. Field finish pipe surfaces as specified prior to installation of insulation.
3.2 APPLICATION
A. Apply insulation and cover materials in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Apply insulation in smooth, clean manner with tight and finished smooth joints. Do not use torn, cracked, or chipped sections. Fit insulation tightly against surfaces.
C. Apply and test heat tracing where specified or indicated on the drawings beforeinstalling insulation.
D. Apply sealant or cement when previous applications or adhesives and cement have thoroughly dried.
E. Apply insulation to permit expansion or contraction of pipelines without damage to insulation or jacketing.
F. Terminate preformed pipe jackets or covering at sufficient distance from flanges to permit removal of bolts.
G. Overlap flange and flanged fitting insulation on adjacent pipe covering by at least 2 inches.
H. Insulate valves up to packing gland only.
I. Provide continuous insulation through and over pipe supports and provide protection saddles at supports.
J. Extend insulation against insulation end protection shields or covers so that insulation voids do not exist and provide water tight end seals and covers where insulation terminates.
K. Insulate pipeline strainers to permit removal of strainer basket without disturbing insulation on strainer body.
L. Provide continuous pipe insulation and covering through sleeves or openings in walls and floors.
M. Apply premolded pipe insulation with extended legs when used on pipe traced with either tubing or electric cable type.
N. Apply piping identification on jackets as specified in Section 22 05 53.05.
08/19/13 2047 40 42 13.10 - 7 Process Piping Thermal Insulation
3.3 REPAIR
A. Restore existing insulation and surfaces disturbed or damaged by application of new pipe insulation.
3.4 THERMAL PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE
THERMAL PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE
System Code and Service Location(1) InsulationType
Vapor Barrier Type
JacketType
ServiceTemp.
FNotes
TWS - Hot Water C 1 none none 105-200
TWS - Hot Water E 1 none 3 105-200
TWS - Cold Water Outdoor
E
1 none 3 below 40
Notes:1. E or C means exposed or concealed piping, respectively.
END OF SECTION
08/19/132047 40 42 13.10 - 8 Process Piping Thermal Insulation
SECTION 40 80 00
COMMISSIONING OF PROCESS SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Work included:
1. It is the intent of these tests to assure that all Process Control Systems (PCS)equipment supplied is functional and within industry and manufacturestolerances and is installed in accordance with manufacturer’s design andspecifications.
2. The testing and commissioning of the PCS shall be performed by the ProcessControl System Contractor (PCSC).
3. The PCSC shall maintain a written record of the tests and upon completion ofproject, assemble and certify a final test report for review by the District.
4. All testing specified in this Section shall be completed during the perioddefined as “functional testing” in Section 01 75 17. Reference Section 01 75 17for additional details regarding the sequencing of this work.
B. Related sections:
1. Section 01 45 27 - Shop Inspection
2. Section 01 75 17 - Field Testing and Startup
3. Section 40 90 00 - Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems.
4. Section 40 94 13 - Digital Process Control Computers
5. Section 40 94 33 - Operator Interface Units
6. Section 40 94 43 - Programmable Logic Process Controllers
7. Section 40 95 13 - Process Control Panels and Hardware
8. Section 40 95 20 - Process control Display Devices
9. Section 40 95 33 - Process Control Networks
10. Section 40 95 73 - Process Control Network Cables
08/19/13 2047 40 80 00- 1 Commissioning of Process Systems
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Experience:
1. The PCSC shall be regularly engaged in the testing of process controlequipment devices, installations, and system integration.
2. The PCSC shall have been engaged in such practices for a minimum of fiveyears.
3. PCSC shall utilize only full-time technicians or engineers who are regularlyemployed by the firm. Electrically unskilled employees are not permitted toperform testing or assistance of any kind. Electricians or linemen may assist,but may not perform testing or inspection services.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. The PCSC shall furnish submittals for approval as outlined below:
1. Proposed field functional and acceptance tests
2. Field functional and acceptance test reports
3. Un-witnessed factory test (UFT)
4. UFT report, certifying the UFT was completed satisfactorily
5. Factory demonstration test (FDT)
6. Functional test (FT)
7. Control system functional test (CSFT)
8. List of proposed testing equipment
1.4 SCHEDULING
A. Work shall be coordinated with other systems in accordance with 01 75 17.
B. The PCSC shall notify the Engineer a minimum of two weeks prior to commencement of any testing.
08/19/13 2047 40 80 00- 2 Commissioning of Process Systems
PART 2 - NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. The PCSC shall perform general equipment inspection and checking procedures recommended by the manufacturer and as specified in other sections of these specifications.
B. Any system, material, or workmanship which is found defective on the basis of acceptance tests shall be reported, corrected and retested all at no additional cost to the District.
3.2 TESTING
A. General:
1. All elements of the PCS hardware shall be tested to demonstrate that the totalsystem satisfies all of the requirements of this specification. The tests areunique to the PCS and the following specification sections:
a. Section 40 94 43 - Programmable Logic Process Controllers.
2. As a minimum, the testing shall include the following:
a. Un-witnessed Factory Test (UFT)
b. Factory Demonstration Tests (FDT)
c. Functional Test (FT)
d. Control System Functional Test (CSFT)
3. The PCSC shall include the tests in the scheduling requirements ofspecification Section 01 75 17 – Field Testing and Startup
4. Each test shall be in the cause and effect format. The person conducting the testshall initiate an input (cause) and, upon the system's producing the correctresult (effect), the specific test requirement will have been satisfied.
5. Except for the Un-witnessed Factory Tests, all tests shall be conducted inaccordance with, and documented on, prior District-approved procedures,forms, and checklists. Each specific test to be performed shall be described anda space provided after it for signoff by the appropriate party after itssatisfactory completion.
08/19/13 2047 40 80 00- 3 Commissioning of Process Systems
6. The District will actively participate in many of the tests. The District reserves the right to test or retest any and all specified functions whether or not explicitly stated in the prior-approved Test Procedures.
7. The District's decision shall be final regarding the acceptability and completeness of all testing.
8. If any of the following witnessed tests or portion of a test fails to the point where it needs to be rescheduled at a later date, additional tests shall be required at the PCSC expense. Included shall be expenses for the Engineer’stravel, accommodations, and sustenance of the same quality used for the original test. Retest expense shall be for a maximum of two persons.
B. Un-witnessed Factory Tests (UFT):
1. Prior to the start of the witnessed Factory Demonstration Test, the panels and panel assemblies shall be inspected and tested at the PCSC factory to ensure that it is fully functional and ready for demonstration testing.
2. All panels and assemblies shall be inspected and tested to verify that they are in conformance with related submittals and these specifications.
C. Factory Demonstration Tests (FDT):
1. At the PCSC factory, the pumping plant control panel 2781-FCS-CP-001 shall be completely assembled, with all internal components functional, PCSC and networking in place so that the control panel can be inspected and the communication and I/O networks tested.
2. PCSC factory demonstration tests shall be witnessed by the District, and the tests shall demonstrate the following:
a. Correctness of wiring from all panel field terminals to all input/output points and to all front of panel components.
b. Proper workmanship and correctness of internal panel and console wiring.
c. Proper operation of operator interface and Ethernet switches.
d. Proper operation and installation of the Ethernet, Modbus, DNP 3.0, and IRIG-B hardware and networks.
3. The PCSC shall allot five eight-hour days for testing and shall have PCSCelectrician or technician available for testing during the duration of the test.
4. At the factory demonstration test, the District shall download software configuration files to the operator interface, PLCs, I/O communication
08/19/132047 40 80 00- 4 Commissioning of Process Systems
modules, and Ethernet switches. These files are for general testing only and will are not the final application files to be used during real system operation.
5. The tests shall demonstrate the specified functions to the satisfaction of theEngineer.
6. All factory test punch list items shall be completed and the Engineer notified inwriting before the panels are released for shipment.
D. Functional Tests (FT):
1. General: Prior to startup, the entire installed PCS shall be certified (inspected,tested, and documented) by the PCSC to ensure the PCS is ready for start up.These inspections and tests shall include the functional test outlined in Section01 75 17 and specific PCS functional tests described in this section.
2. The following PCS functions shall be tested during the FT:
a. Power failure and system restart.
b. Fault detection.
c. Diagnostic functions:
1) On line
2) Off line
3) Error codes
d. Ethernet, DNP 3.0, Modbus, and IRIG-B communications
3. As a minimum, the following PCS items shall be inspected:
a. Wiring
b. Copper and fiber optic network terminations
c. I/O, power supply, I/O rack, fusing, cabling, sub-chassis power supplyloading and calculations
d. Spare installed and non-installed I/O
e. Component layout, future spare allocation
f. Identification, labels:
1) Cables
08/19/13 2047 40 80 00- 5 Commissioning of Process Systems
2) Sub-chassis
3) Power supplies
4) I/O cards
5) Wiring
4. Loop/Component Inspections and Tests: The entire PCS shall be checked forproper installation, calibrated, and adjusted on a loop-by-loop andcomponent-by-component basis from the field device to the PLC I/O terminalsto ensure that it is in conformance with related submittals and thesespecifications.
a. The Loop/Component Inspections and Tests shall be implemented usingDistrict-approved forms and checklists. The testing checklists shall bedeveloped on Microsoft Access and configured to sort and search for allloops that have not been tested, wired, installed, calibrated, etc.
1) Each loop shall have a Loop Status Report to organize and track itsinspection, adjustment, and calibration. These reports shall includethe following information and checklist items with spaces for signoffby the PCSC and District:
a) Project Name
b) Loop Number, assigned by the PCSC
c) Tag Number for each component
d) The following checklist/signoffs for each component:
i) Tag/identification
ii) Installation
iii) Termination-wiring
iv) Termination-tubing
v) Calibration/adjustment
vi) FT complete
e) The following checklist/signoffs for the loop:
i) Panel interface terminations
ii) I/O interface terminations with PCS
08/19/13 2047 40 80 00- 6 Commissioning of Process Systems
iii) I/O signal operation relative to PCS, inputs/outputsoperational: received/sent, processed, adjusted
iv) PCS functions
v) Total loop operational
vi) Space for comments
2) Each active element (except simple hand switches, lights, etc.) andeach PCS I/O module shall have a Component Calibration Sheet.These calibration sheets shall also be developed in Microsoft Accessand configured to sort by loop number and status of calibrationcheck. These sheets shall have the following information, spaces fordata entry, and a space for signoff by the PCSC and the District:
a) Project Name
b) Loop Number (ISA 5.04)
c) Component Tag Number or I/O Module Number
d) Component Code Number
e) Manufacturer
f) Model Number/Serial Number
g) Summary of Functional Requirements, for example:
i) For Indicators and Recorders: Scale and chart ranges
ii) For Transmitters/Converters: Input and output ranges
iii) For Computing Elements: Function
iv) For Controllers: Action (direct/reverse), control modes(PID), configuration diagram, scales
v) For Switching Elements: Unit range, differential(FIXED/ADJUSTABLE), reset (AUTO/MANUAL)
vi) For I/O Modules: Input or output
h) Calibrations; for example:
i) For Analog Devices: Required and actual inputs andoutputs at 0, 10, 50, and 100 percent of span, rising andfalling
08/19/13 2047 40 80 00- 7 Commissioning of Process Systems
ii) For Discrete Devices: Required and actual trip points and reset points
iii) For Controllers: Mode settings (PID)
iv) For analog I/O Modules: Required and actual inputs or outputs of 0, 10, 50, and 100 percent of span, rising and falling
i) Space for comments
j) Space for signoff by the PCSC
b. The PCSC shall maintain the Component Calibration Sheets at the jobsite and make them available to the District at any time.
c. The PCSC shall provide the Loop Status Reports for the District. After a specific test has been completed, the PCSC shall provide a copy of the signed-off test form to the District, and the PCSC shall enter it in the data file.
d. These inspections and tests shall require witnessing by the District.
E. Startup Tests:
1. General: Startup test shall not proceed until the Control System FunctionalTest has been successfully completed. Startup testing shall be in accordance with Section 01 75 17, Field Testing and Startup.
END OF SECTION
08/19/132047 40 80 00- 8 Commissioning of Process Systems
SECTION 40 90 00
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR PROCESS SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. This section covers work by the Process Control System Contractor (PCSC),necessary for engineering, furnishing, installing, calibrating, adjusting, testing,documenting, and starting up the Instrument and Controls for Process Systems(ICPS).
B. Major Constituents: Major constituents of this system shall include all materials, equipment, and work required to implement a complete and operating ICPS and shall include furnishing and installing the following:
1. Primary elements and transmitters, analog display and control elements,discrete primary elements, discrete display and control elements, control panelsand panel mounted devices as shown, and associated ancillary devices.
2. Programmable logic controllers (PLC), and operator interfaces units (OIU).The PCSC shall provide all required software, and the District will perform allPLC and OIU programming.
C. Related work specified elsewhere:
1. Section 01 43 11 – Seismic Requirements
2. Section 01 75 17 – Field Testing and Startup
3. Section 26 05 19 – Low- Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables
4. Division 27 - Communications
5. Section 33 09 11 - Instruments and Recorders
6. Section 40 94 43 - Programmable Logic Process Controllers
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Signal Characteristics:
1. Analog signals are 4 to 20 mA dc and shall conform to the compatibilityrequirements of ISA S50.1. Unless otherwise noted, circuits shall be ISAS50.1, Type 2, two-wire. Transmitters shall have a load resistance capabilityconforming to Class L. Transmitters and receivers shall be fully isolated.
08/19/13 Instrument And Control2047 40 90 00 - 1 for Process Systems
Within panels where a common 1 percent dropping resistor is used, analog signals are 2 to 10 Vdc.
2. Discrete signals are two-state logic signals and shall use 24VDC or 120 VACsources as noted.
3. Digital signals are binary coded signals.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Responsibility
1. The PCSC shall be responsible for:
a. Complete systems functionally operational in accordance with the intentof these Contract Documents.
b. Coordinating the details of equipment layouts and construction for allspecification divisions which affect the work covered under Division 40,Process Integration. The majority of process integration coordination isspecified in Division 01, Division 26, Division 27, Division 28, Division33, and Division 40. However, the Contractor is responsible forcoordination with all applicable sections of the contract documents. Thecontract documents are a single integrated document, and as such allDivisions and Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the PCSC toreview all sections to ensure a complete and coordinated project.
c. Furnishing and installing all incidental items not actually shown orspecified, but which are required by good practice to provide completefunctional systems.
2. The PCSC shall provide the following minimum ICPS scope of work:
a. For control panels, components, and ancillaries specified under thisdivision provide the following:
1) Coordinating to ensure that:
a) The proper type, size, and number of signal wires with theirraceways are provided and installed.
b) The proper electrical power circuits with their raceways areprovided and installed.
c) The proper size, type, materials of construction, andconnections of process mechanical piping are provided andinstalled for in-line primary elements.
2) Provide panels, components, and ancillaries.
08/19/13 Instrument And Control2047 40 90 00 - 2 for Process Systems
b. Provide and install field instrumentation.
c. Provide and install PLCs and OIUs.
d. Provide and install control panel fiber optic and copper network cabling.
e. Provide the specified submittals.
f. Provide instructions, details, and advice to, and coordinating with, theContractor to ensure proper installation.
g. Certify correctness of installations.
h. Verify final power and signal connections and labeling (lugging andconnecting).
i. Adjust and calibrate instruments and components.
j. Startup and testing support.
3. The PCSC shall be an instrumentation and control (I&C) system contractor thathas at least 5 years of experience installing similar systems.
4. Electrical Raceways and Wiring: All electrical raceways external to panels,consoles, assemblies, and components provided under Division 40, arespecified, provided, and installed under Division 26, Electrical or Division 33,Utilities. All wiring and cables external to panels, consoles, assemblies, andcomponents provided under Division 40, are specified, provided, installed, andtagged under Division 26, Electrical. All wire terminations are specified to bemade under Division 26, Electrical.
5. The PCSC shall make all final power and signal connections, to all equipmentspecified in Division 40. For all elements provided under Division 40 and allelements interfaced by the I & C system, the PCSC shall verify and certify bywritten notice to the District, correctness of final signal connections andcorrectness of adjustment.
B. Design Requirements
1. Control, status, alarm, and indication functions are shown on the drawings inProcess and Instrumentation Diagram (P & ID) form in accordance with theInstrumentation Society of America (ISA), Standard S5.1, except as noted.These drawings show the functional requirements and general location of eachfunction to be provided.
2. The design of the ICPS is based on the first named manufacturers of theequipment and materials. Should the PCSC select other equipment thatrequires different installation requirements, wiring and conduit, enclosures,accessories, etc., the PCSC shall obtain approval from the Engineer for such
08/19/13 Instrument And Control2047 40 90 00 - 3 for Process Systems
changes to the design in accordance with Article 1.5 SUBMITTALS and shall make all approved changes at no additional cost to the District.
3. Like items of equipment of the ICPS shall be the end products of onemanufacturer and of the same series or family of models in order to achievestandardization for appearance, operation, maintenance, spare parts, andmanufacturer's services. All same or similar functions shall be implemented inthe same or similar manner. For example, control logic, sequence controls,display layouts, etc.
C. Performance Requirements
1. The PCSC shall perform the following functions:
a. Measure and monitor discrete and continuous process and processequipment variables
b. Effectively present the process and process equipment variables to theoperators to allow them to accurately monitor and change the status of theplant's processes
2. The PCSC shall provide all of the functions shown on the contract drawings.Major equipment items are specified; however, all items of materials andequipment, whether indicated or not, that are necessary to effect the requiredloop performance shall be provided.
3. The PCSC shall assign a competent, on-site field representative who shallsupervise the electrical construction work from beginning to completion andfinal acceptance.
4. Skilled workers who have had experience working on similar projects shallperform all labor.
5. The PCSC shall install all equipment and materials in accordance with thedesign and vendor-furnished, District-approved drawings.
6. Any required work to correct improperly fitted installations shall be performedby the PCSC at no cost to the District.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. General: In addition to the requirements of Section 01 33 00 Submittals Procedures, the following requirements shall be satisfied for submittals relating to work provided under Division 40:
1. All submittals shall be complete, neat, orderly, indexed with labeled tabdividers. Partial submittals will not be accepted.
08/19/13 Instrument And Control2047 40 90 00 - 4 for Process Systems
2. The number of final copies for each submittal shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 00 unless otherwise noted. Submittals may be broken down into smaller packages with the approval of the Engineer.
a. Design-Related Submittals:
1) Design.
2) Hardware.
3) Application Software.
b. Spares, Expendables, and Test Equipment Lists
3. Before any components are fabricated, and/or integrated into assemblies, or shipped to the site, furnish to the District, and receive for review of full details, shop drawings, catalog cuts, and such other descriptive matter and documentation as may be required to fully describe the equipment and options proposed and to demonstrate its conformity to these specifications. The decision of the District upon the acceptability of any submittal shall be final. Catalog information shall be submitted for all equipment, regardless of whetheror not it is of the same manufacture as that listed in the specifications.
4. All submittals shall be complete, neat, orderly, bound in a three-ring binder and tabbed. Partial submittals will not be accepted. All components shall be referenced by the instrument tag name designations shown. List proposed exceptions and/or deviations to these Contract Documents contained in each submittal.
5. If, in the opinion of the District, a submittal is not clear, it will be returned to the PCSC and it shall be revised and resubmitted.
B. Design-Related Submittals:
1. Design:
a. Submit full details, panel fabrication drawings, panel power distribution drawings, wiring diagrams, panel arrangement drawings, catalog cuts, and such descriptive literature and documentation as may be required to demonstrate conformance to these drawing and specifications. These submittals shall clearly identify specific items and options proposed to be provided. In addition, these submittals shall clearly identify installed spares and other provisions for future work (e.g., reserved panel space; unused components, wiring, terminals, etc.).
b. All design drawings, panel drawings, wiring diagrams, loop diagrams, and interconnection diagrams shall be drafted using the latest version of Autocad or Intergraph's MicroStation. Drawings shall be developed in
08/19/13 Instrument And Control2047 40 90 00 - 5 for Process Systems
accordance with the District's procedures and standards, copies of which are available on request.
c. Legends and Abbreviations Lists: As part of the first Design-RelatedSubmittals for each subsystem, submit a complete definition of symbolsand abbreviations used on this project. For example: engineering units,flowstreams, instruments, structures, and other process items used innameplates, legends, data sheets, and point descriptions. The sameabbreviations shall be used through the design subsystems. Submitupdated versions with subsequent submittals and a final version with theO&M Manuals.
d. Submit complete, detailed panel elementary diagrams of all pre-wiredpanels. Diagrams shall be similar to those typical diagrams shown on thedrawings, but with the addition of all the auxiliary devices such as relays,alarms, fuses, circuit breakers, lights, fans, heaters, etc. Provide panelcontrol diagrams for all discrete control and power circuits. Diagramsshall be ladder type schematic diagrams similar to the typical diagramsshown in the drawings, but shall include all devices requiring electricalconnections. Panel control diagrams shall identify all wire numbers andtypes, terminal numbers, tag numbers, and PLC input/output I/Oidentification (rack and slot) numbers. Control diagrams shall show allcircuits individually; no common diagrams will be allowed. Line numbersand sheet numbers shall reference relay contacts. Where multiple relaysare required, their coils shall be wired parallel. All discrete devices shallbe labeled to define their switching action (close on rising or close onfalling process variable.
e. Submit comprehensive, system-wide interconnecting wiring diagrams thatfollow the format shown on the drawings, showing all component andpanel terminal board identification numbers and external wire numbers inthe same format as shown on the drawings. Wiring tables or wire lists willnot be considered as a suitable substitute for these drawings unlessapproved by the District. These diagrams shall include all intermediateterminations between field elements and panels (e.g., terminal junctionboxes, motor control centers, etc.) and shall document every field wireand cable shown on the cable schedule in the drawings. This requirementcovers all equipment on the project with field wiring installed, not justIPCS equipment. It is the PCSC’s responsibility to obtain shop drawingsand any other necessary documentation from the Contractor forequipment not supplied under the PCSC’s scope of work. These diagramsshall be coordinated with the electrical subcontractor and shall bear astatement that this has been done. Reference the drawings for a typicalinterconnecting wiring diagram showing the format to be used. Thesedrawings shall be provided to the electrical subcontractor for wiringsystem coordination and shall be used to provide wire numbers on thefield wiring that is identical to the panel wire number. When wire
08/19/13 Instrument And Control2047 40 90 00 - 6 for Process Systems
numbers are not shown on the drawings, the PCSC shall contact the District to obtain wire numbers.
f. Submit loop diagrams that shall consist of an individual wiring diagramfor each analog loop showing all devices in the loop, wire and terminalnumbers, the location of the dc power supply, instrument tag numbers anddescriptions, scale ranges, calibration data, and the location of anycommon dropping resistors, fuses, shield grounds, etc. The loop diagramsshall be in the format as shown on the drawings. The loop diagrams shallmeet the minimum requirements of ISA S5.4 plus the followingrequirements:
1) Each loop diagram shall be divided into three areas for identificationof element locations:
a) Panel face
b) Back-of-panel
c) Field (including terminal and/or junction box if used)
2) On each diagram present a tabular summary of:
a) The output capability of the transmitting instruments
3) Loop diagrams shall be on individual 11-inch by 17-inch drawingsand shall include all pertinent information, including calibrationdata, set points, etc.
g. It is not acceptable to combine the information from submittal item 1.5 B1 e (interconnection diagrams) and 1.5 B 1 f (loop diagrams) withoutwritten approval from the Engineer. The PCSC shall submit separate fulland complete submittals for interconnection and loop diagrams in theirbid.
h. Submit power requirement and heat dissipation summary for all controlpanels. Power requirements shall state required voltages, currents, andphases(s). Heat dissipations shall be maximums and shall be given inBtu/hr. Summaries shall be supplemented with calculations. Providecomplete panel power distribution wiring diagrams for each control panel.
i. Panel Construction Drawings: Submit shop drawings and catalog materialfor all control and field panels, instrument racks, and enclosures.Drawings shall be to scale and shall show the location of all panelmounted devices as well as doors, louvers, and sub-panels. Drawingsshall include a panel legend and a bill of materials. The panel legend shalllist and identify all front of panel devices by their assigned tag numbers,all nameplate inscriptions, service legends, and annunciator inscriptions.
08/19/13 Instrument And Control2047 40 90 00 - 7 for Process Systems
The bill of materials shall list all devices mounted within the panel that are not listed in the panel legend, and shall include the tag number, description, manufacturer, and model number for each.
j. Panel Plumbing Diagrams: Diagrams for each panel containing pipingand/or tubing shall be submitted showing pipes/tubes (size and materials);components (type, size, and materials); connections to panel mounteddevices (size and type); and panel interface connections (size and type).
k. Submit drawings showing any modifications or additional details as maybe required to supplement the Contract Documents and adequately definethe installation of the ICPS elements.
l. Submit seismic calculations In accordance with Section 26 05 00Common Work Results for Electrical and Section 01 43 11.
2. Hardware:
a. Bill of Materials: Submit a listing of all the panels, racks, instruments,PLCs, OIUs, and equipment supplied as a part of the ICPS. Allcomponents shall be grouped by component type. Submit the list inelectronic format in a Microsoft Access compatible file and contain, as aminimum, the following:
1) Tag number.
2) Instrument, panel, rack or device, tag number
3) Description
4) Quantity supplied
5) Reference to component data sheet and catalog cut
6) Component type
7) Manufacturer
8) Model number
9) Part number
10) Calibration information
11) Wiring diagram sheet or drawing number
12) Electrical, and process drawing sheet or drawing number
08/19/13 Instrument And Control2047 40 90 00 - 8 for Process Systems
b. Submit catalog information, descriptive literature, wiring diagrams(showing internal wiring and external connections for power and signal),and shop drawings for all recorders, indicators, transmitters, primaryelements, flowmeters, PLCs, I/O modules, OIUs, networking equipmentand appurtenances, and all other components of the ICPS. Also, providecatalog information on all electrical devices furnished under this Division40 (for example: power supplies, relays, surge suppressors, terminalblocks, circuit breakers, heaters, thermostats, lighting, enclosures andelectrical cabinets, fans, louver kits, etc.).
c. Individual data sheet (or specification) listing shall be provided for allcomponents provided under this Division 40. The purpose of these datasheets is to supplement the generalized catalog information provided byciting all specific features for each specific component (e.g.:manufacturer, model number, scale range, set point, materials ofconstruction, special options included, etc.). Each component data sheetshall bear the component name and instrument tag number designationshown in the drawings and Specifications. All data sheets shall use theISA format and shall be done using Microsoft Word, Excel, or Accesswith two copies of the disk files delivered to the District at the end of theproject.
d. Submit catalog information on all electrical devices furnished under thisDivision 40.
e. Submit shop drawings and catalog material for all control panels andenclosures. Provide control panels sized as shown on the drawings.Where control panel dimensions have not been shown, size panels with aminimum of 30 percent spare usable space horizontally and vertically onall internal and external panel surfaces and mounting panels. Drawingsshall be to scale and shall show the location of all panel mounted devices(such as terminal blocks, relays, wire ducts, power supplies, color codingof terminal strips, nameplates, etc.) as well as doors, louvers, andsubpanels. Drawings shall include a panel legend and a bill of materials.The panel legend shall list and identify all front of panel devices by theirassigned tag numbers, all nameplate inscriptions, service legends, andannunciator inscriptions. The bill of materials shall list all devicesmounted within the panel that are not listed in the panel legend, and shallinclude the tag number, description, manufacturer, and model number foreach.
3. O&M Manual Submittals:
a. O&M manuals shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00and Section 40 01 50 Supplemental Operations and Maintenance ManualRequirements for Process Integration.
08/19/13 Instrument And Control2047 40 90 00 - 9 for Process Systems
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications
1. The PCSC shall be a licensed UL508 electrical contractor.
B. Regulatory Requirements
1. Codes and Standards: Unless otherwise specified herein, or shown on thedrawings, work under this specification shall be performed in accordance withthe following codes, standards and publications to the extent indicated by thereferences herein. The date of issue or version shall be the current version attime of bid. Any conflict among these standards shall be brought to theattention of the Engineer for clarification and final ruling.
a. NFPA Standard 70 National Electrical Code
b. IEEE Standard 472 Electrical Surge Protection
c. EIA Standard RS-232-C Interface between data terminal equipment anddata communication equipment employing serial binary data interchange
d. EIA Standard RS-485 Electrical characteristics of balanced voltage digitalinterface circuits
e. NEMA ICS6 Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems
f. SAMA PMC-33.1 Electromagnetic Susceptibility of Process ControlInstrumentation
g. IEEE 472 Electrical Surge Protection
h. ISA S5.1 Instrumentation Symbols and Identification
i. ISA S20 Specification Forms for Process Measurement and ControlInstruments, Primary Elements and Control Valves
C. Certifications
1. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: Unless otherwise specified, electricalequipment and material shall be listed and labeled for the purpose for which itis used by the Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL). All control panels providedunder this Division 40 shall have a UL stamp and be constructed by a ULapproved panel fabrication shop.
D. Coordination meetings
1. Coordination meetings shall be held periodically during the course of theproject. The PCSC shall summarize resolutions reached in each coordination
08/19/13 Instrument And Control2047 40 90 00 - 10 for Process Systems
meeting and send a copy to the Engineer. The first meeting shall be scheduled within 90 days after Notice to Proceed is issued to the PCSC. The PCSC shall provide for a minimum of four such meetings.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Throughout this contract, the PCSC shall provide protection for materials and equipment against loss or damage and from the effects of weather. Prior to installation, store items in indoors in a dry location and follow all manufacturers' storage instructions. Provide heating in storage areas for items subject to corrosion under damp conditions. Provide covers for panels and other elements that may be exposed to dusty construction environments. Specific storage requirements shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations of the equipment being provided.
B. Close and latch all panel access doors whenever work is not being done in them and before leaving the site each day.
1.7 SYSTEM STARTUP
A. For certain components or systems provided under this Division 40 but not manufactured by the PCSC, the services of qualified manufacturer's representative shall be provided during installation, startup, and demonstration testing and District training.
1.8 COMMISSIONING
A. Testing shall be performed in accordance with Section 01 75 17 and Section 40 80 00 Commissioning of Process Systems.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Seismic design requirements: See Section 01 43 11, Seismic Requirements for seismic requirements, including structural integrity, anchorage, and proof of compliance.
B. All components shall be new and of the best quality, constructed of durable materials, and designed for long life in continuous service with a minimum of maintenance.
C. All mechanisms shall be enclosed in such a manner that they shall be protected against damage from dust, moisture, or striking by external objects.
D. Where shown in the specifications or on the drawings, components shall comply with the referenced codes and standards.
E. All freestanding or floor-mounted equipment shall be front aligned.
08/19/13 Instrument And Control2047 40 90 00 - 11 for Process Systems
2.2 NAMETAGS
A. All components provided under this Division 40, both field and panel mounted, shall be tagged and identified in accordance with Section 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems.
2.3 EQUIPMENT FINISH
A. Provide materials and equipment with manufacturer's standard finish system in accordance with Section 09 91 00, Painting. Provide manufacturer's standard finish color, except where specific color is indicated or specified. If manufacturer has no standard color, finish equipment with light gray color.
2.4 PANELS AND PANEL MOUNTED EQUIPMENT
A. Panels and panel-mounted equipment shall be assembled as far as possible at the PCSC's factory. No work, other than correction of minor defects or minor transit damage, shall be done on the panels at the jobsite.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install materials and equipment in a workmanlike manner utilizing craftsmen skilled in the particular trade. Provide work that has a neat and finished appearance. Coordinate I&C work with the Engineer and work of other trades to avoid conflicts, errors, delays, and unnecessary interference with operation of the plant during construction. Provide all information necessary to coordinate the control interfaces for the switchgear, medium-voltage control switchboard, VFDs, HVAC, security and all other packaged system controls.
B. Wiring
a. All wiring external to ICPS components and assemblies and all power wiringshall conform to the requirements of Division 26, Electrical.
b. Plastic ducts or ties shall restrain all wiring within ICPS panels andenclosures. Major runs of wiring inside panels shall be installed in plasticducts. Hinge wiring shall be secured at each end so that any bending ortwisting will be around the longitudinal axis of the wire and the bend areashall be protected with a sleeve.
i. Arrange wiring neatly, cut to proper length, and remove surplus wire.All panel wires shall be terminated with ferrules of proper size.Provide abrasion protection for any wire bundles that pass throughholes or across edges of sheet metal.
ii. No more than two wires may be installed on a single screw terminal.Where crimp connections are used, crimper shall be the ratchet type.
08/19/13 Instrument And Control2047 40 90 00 - 12 for Process Systems
iii. For connections to compression clamp type terminals; strip, prepare,and install wires in accordance with the terminal manufacturer'srecommendations. No more than one wire shall be installed in eachcompression screw and yoke.
iv. Wiring shall not be spliced or tapped except at device terminals orterminal blocks. All wiring connections shall be made by terminalblocks, including signal ground shields.
v. 24 Vdc and analog signal circuits shall be terminated on color codedterminal blocks separate from color coded ac circuit terminal blocks.
vi. Separate all analog and other dc circuits at least 6 inches from any acpower and control wiring, except at unavoidable crossover points andat device terminations. Where crossover points exist, they shall crossat right angles.
vii. Conductor tags shall be provided as specified in Section 26 05 19 andSection 26 05 53 and as shown on the drawings.
3.2 CLEANING AND TOUCHUP PAINTING
A. Keep the premises free from accumulation of waste material or rubbish. Upon completion of work, remove materials, scraps, and debris from premises and from interior and exterior of all devices and equipment. Touchup scratches, scrapes, or chips in interior and exterior surfaces of devices and equipment with finishes matching as nearly as possible the type, color, consistency, and type of surface of the original finish. Clean and polish the exterior of all panels and enclosures upon the completion of the FAT.
3.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspection
1. All materials, equipment, and workmanship shall be subject to inspection atany time by the District. Correct any work, materials, or equipment not inaccordance with these Contract Documents or found to be deficient ordefective in a manner satisfactory to the District at no additional cost to theDistrict.
END OF SECTION
08/19/13 Instrument And Control2047 40 90 00 - 13 for Process Systems
SECTION 40 94 13
DIGITAL PROCESS CONTROL COMPUTERS
PART 1 - DESCRIPTION
1.1 GENERAL
A. Work included
1. Furnish two (Qty. 2) control system programming notebook/laptopcomputer(s).
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. The following items shall be delivered to the District 60 days after Notice to Proceed C/O Dado Hernandez, Senior Electrical Engineer, Instrumentation, Control and Power Engineering Section, Design Division, East Bay Municipal Utility District, 375 11th Street, MS 502, Oakland CA 94607.
1. Control System programming, notebook/laptop computer(s).
1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE:
A. Section 01 21 00 - Allowances.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. The Contractor shall provide an allowance of $1,500 per notebook/laptop to purchase and furnish the number of control system programming notebooks/laptops indicated in Article 1.1. See Section 01 21 00 – Allowances.
2.2 CONTROL SYSTEM PROGRAMMING NOTEBOOK/LAPTOP COMPUTER
A. The notebook(s)/laptop(s) shall meet the specifications of the latest District standard notebook/laptop. Prior to purchasing the notebook(s)/laptop(s), the Contractor shall contact the Engineer and request a copy of the District notebook/laptop specification.
B. Notebook/Laptop Operating System software:
1. The Contractor shall provide the operating system software disk and license foreach notebook/laptop delivered to the District.
PART 3 - NOT USED
END OF SECTION
08/19/13 Digital Process2047 40 94 13-1 Control Computers
SECTION 40 94 33
OPERATOR INTERFACE UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Furnish and install Operator Interface Units (OIU)
2. Operator Interface Units and related equipment have been specified on a “no orequal” basis in order to match existing District control equipment. Nohardware and software products other than the exact model numbers specifiedwill be acceptable.
3. All software configuration will be provided by the District.
B. Related sections:
1. Section 01 75 17 - Field Testing and Startup
2. Section 40 95 13 - Process Control Panels and Hardware
3. Section 40 96 35 - Process Control Software Programming
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Applicable codes and standards: design, fabricate, assemble, and test equipment so that upon installation and operation in accordance with manufacturer's recommended procedures for this application the equipment will conform with all applicable codes and standards. The date of issue or version shall be the current version at time of bid.
1. NFPA Standard 70 National Electrical Code
2. IEEE Standard 472 Electrical Surge Protection
3. EIA Standard RS-232-C Interface between data terminal equipment and datacommunication equipment employing serial binary data interchange
4. NEMA ICS6 Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be made in accordance with Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures and Section 40 90 00 Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems.
08/19/13 2047 40 94 33 - 1 Operator Interface Units
B. The Contractor shall furnish submittals for approval as outlined below:
1. Product data.
C. The following items shall be delivered to the District 60 days after Notice to Proceed C/O Dado Hernandez, Senior Electrical Engineer, Instrumentation, Control and Power Engineering Section, Design Division, East Bay Municipal Utility District, 375 11th Street, MS 502, Oakland CA 94607.
1. Extra materials specified in this Section.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Operator Interface Units shall be fully installed in the control panel prior to shipping to the site from the factory.
1.5 MAINTENANCE
A. Extra materials
1. Provide one spare of every item specified in this Section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 OPERATOR INTERFACE UNIT (OIU)
A. The OIU shall have the following features and characteristics:
1. Processor: 800 MHz, fanless CPU.
2. Memory: 256 MB of Flash memory; 256 MB of DRAM.
3. Connectivity: One Ethernet 10/100 Base-T port, two RS-232 serial ports, 1 USB host port, 1 SD card slot, 1 line out, 1 microphone in.
4. Display: 15 inch active matrix TFT color LCD touch screen display with 1024x768 resolution.
5. Include keypad and touch screen input.
6. Operating Temperature: 0 to 50 degree Celsius with a relative humidity of 10 to 80 percent non-condensing.
7. Aluminum NEMA 4 enclosure.
8. Power: 24 VDC.
9. Acceptable products: Maple Systems, part number HMI5150P, with PLC connecting cable, part number 7446-0137-5, USB configuration cable, part
08/19/132047 40 94 33 - 2 Operator Interface Units
number 7431-0115, and windows-based configuration software, part number EZware. No substitutions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FACTORY QUALITY CONTROL
A. General:
1. Process Control System Supplier service personnel shall perform all factory tests, inspections, and adjustments as specified in section 40 80 00.
END OF SECTION
08/19/132047 40 94 33 - 3 Operator Interface Units
SECTION 40 94 43
PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC PROCESS CONTROLLERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Furnish and install Programmable Logic Controllers (PLC) and Remote Terminal Unit (RTU).
2. PLC and related equipment has been specified on a “no or equal” basis in order to match existing District control equipment. No hardware and software products other than the exact model numbers specified will be acceptable.
3. All software configuration will be provided by the District.
B. Related sections:
1. Section 01 75 17 - Field Testing and Startup
2. Section 40 80 00 Commissioning of Process Systems
3. Section 40 90 00 Instrument and Controls for Process Systems
4. Section 40 94 13 Digital Process Control Computers
5. Section 40 95 13 Process Control Panels and Hardware
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Codes and Standards: Unless otherwise specified herein, or shown on the drawings, work under this Specification shall be performed in accordance with the following codes, standards and publications to the extent indicated by the references herein. Any conflict among these standards shall be brought to the attention of the District for clarification and final ruling. The date of issue or version shall be the current version at time of bid.
1. NFPA Standard 70 National Electrical Code
2. IEEE Standard 472Electrical Surge Protection
3. EIA Standard RS-232-C Interface between data terminal equipment and data communication equipment employing serial binary data interchange
4. EIA Standard RS-422-A.Electrical characteristics of balanced voltage digital interface circuits.
08/19/13 Programmable Logic2047 40 94 43-1 Process Controllers
5. NEMA ICS6 Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems
6. SAMA PMC-33.1 Electromagnetic Susceptibility of Process Control Instrumentation
7. IEEE 519 Recommended Practices and Requirements for Harmonic Control in Electric Power Systems
8. ISA S5.1 Instrumentation Symbols and Identification
9. ISA S20 Specification Forms for Process Measurement and Control Instruments, Primary Elements and Control Valves
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be made in accordance with Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures and Section 40 90 00 Instrumentation and Control for Process Systems.
B. The Contractor shall furnish submittals for approval as outlined below:
1. Product data.
C. The following items shall be delivered to the District 60 days after Notice to Proceed C/O Dado Hernandez, Senior Electrical Engineer, Instrumentation, Control and Power Engineering Section, Design Division, East Bay Municipal Utility District, 375 11th Street, MS 502, Oakland CA 94607.
1. Extra materials specified in this Section.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Programmable Logic Process Control System shall be fully installed in the control panel prior to shipping to the site from the factory.
1.5 MAINTENANCE
A. Extra materials
1. Provide one spare of every item specified in this Section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER (PLC)
A. Base unit:
1. Acceptable products: Rockwell MicroLogix 1400 Controller, Catalog No. 1766-L32BXBA. No substitutions.
08/19/13 Programmable Logic2047 40 94 43-2 Process Controllers
B. Modbus RS-485 communication adapter:
1. Acceptable Product: Rockwell Catalog No. 1763-NC01. No substitutions.
C. Memory module:
1. Acceptable Product: Rockwell Catalog No. 1766-MM1. No substitutions.
D. Expansion I/O module:
1. Analog
a. Acceptable Product: Rockwell Catalog No. 1762-IF4. No substitutions.
E. Programming software:
1. Acceptable Product: Rockwell Catalog No. 9324-RL0300ENE. No substitutions.
F. Interface cables:
1. Channel 0:
a. Acceptable Product: Rockwell Catalog No. 1761-CBL-PM02. No substitutions.
2. Channel 2:
a. Acceptable Product: Rockwell Catalog No. 1747-CP3. No substitutions.
2.2 REMOTE TELEMETRY UNIT (RTU)
A. RTU
1. Acceptable Product: Schneider Electric Control Microsystems SCADAPackCatalog No. TBUP357-1A20-AB20. No substitutions.
B. Interface cables:
1. Serial port COM 2: Schneider Electric Control Microsystems SCADAPack Catalog No. TBUM297218. No substitutions.
2. Serial port COM 3: Schneider Electric Control Microsystems SCADAPack Catalog No. TBUM297217. No substitutions.
08/19/13 Programmable Logic2047 40 94 43-3 Process Controllers
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FACTORY QUALITY CONTROL
A. Refer to specification Section 40 80 00 for all PLC Factory commissioning and testing requirements.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install equipment specified above as shown on the drawings. Follow all manufacturers’ instructions when installing PLCs, networks, and accessories.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Refer to specification Section 40 80 00 for all PLC field commissioning and testing requirements
END OF SECTION
08/19/13 Programmable Logic2047 40 94 43-4 Process Controllers
SECTION 40 95 13
PROCESS CONTROL PANELS AND HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes:
1. Control panel as shown on the drawings and specified herein.
B. Related sections:
1. Section 01 43 11 – Seismic Requirements
2. Section 01 45 27 – Shop Inspection
3. Section 01 75 17 – Field Testing and Startup
4. Section 26 05 19 – Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables
5. Section 26 05 53 – Identification for Electrical Systems
6. Section 27 11 19 – Communications Terminal Blocks and Patch Panels
7. Section 27 21 23 – Data Communications Switches and Hubs
8. Section 40 80 00 – Commissioning of Process Systems
9. Section 40 94 33 – Operator Interface Units
10. Section 40 94 43 – Programmable Logic Process Controllers
11. Section 40 95 20 – Process Control Display Devices
12. Section 40 95 73 – Process Control Network Cables
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Codes and Standards: Unless otherwise specified herein, or shown on the drawings, work under this specification shall be performed in accordance with the following codes, standards and publications to the extent indicated by the references herein. Any conflict among these standards shall be brought to the attention of the District for clarification and final ruling. The date of issue or version shall be the current version at time of bid.
1. NFPA Standard 70 National Electrical Code
08/19/132047 40 95 13-1 Panels and Hardware
2. IEEE Standard 472Electrical Surge Protection
3. EIA Standard RS-232-C Interface between data terminal equipment and data communication equipment employing serial binary data interchange
4. EIA Standard RS-422-A Electrical characteristics of balanced voltage digital interface circuits
5. NEMA ICS6 Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems
6. SAMA PMC-33.1 Electromagnetic Susceptibility of Process Control Instrumentation
7. IEEE 519 Recommended Practices and Requirements for Harmonic Control in Electric Power Systems
8. IEEE 472 Electrical Surge Protection
9. ISA S5.1 Instrumentation Symbols and Identification
10. ISA S20 Specification Forms for Process Measurement and Control Instruments, Primary Elements and Control Valves
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. The Contractor shall furnish submittals for approval as outlined below:
1. Product data.
2. Warranty.
3. Bill of materials.
4. Plan, front, and side view drawing including overall dimensions, weights, and anchoring details.
5. Assembly drawing.
6. All design drawings, panel drawings, wiring diagrams, loop diagrams, and interconnection diagrams shall be drafted using the latest version of Intergraph's MicroStation. Drawings shall be developed in accordance with the District's procedures and standards, copies of which are available on request.
7. Catalog material for all control panels and enclosures. Provide control panels sized as shown on the drawings. Where control panel dimensions have not been shown, size panels with a minimum of 30 percent spare usable space horizontally and vertically on all internal and external panel surfaces and mounting panels. Drawings shall be to scale and shall show the location of all
08/19/132047 40 95 13-2 Panels and Hardware
panel mounted devices (such as terminal blocks, relays, wire ducts, power supplies, color coding of terminal strips, nameplates, etc.) as well as doors, louvers, and subpanels. Drawings shall include a panel legend and a bill of materials. The panel legend shall list and identify all front of panel devices by their assigned tag numbers, all nameplate inscriptions, service legends, and annunciator inscriptions. The bill of materials shall list all devices mounted within the panel that are not listed in the panel legend, and shall include the tag number, description, manufacturer, and model number for each
8. Catalog cuts of all application software being provided
9. Internal schematics (elementary diagrams), wiring diagrams, and point-to-point interconnection diagrams for all components internal and external connections.
10. Detailed panel elementary diagrams of all pre-wired panels. Diagrams shall be similar to those typical diagrams shown on the drawings, but with the addition of all the auxiliary devices such as relays, alarms, fuses, circuit breakers, lights, fans, heaters, etc. Provide panel control diagrams for all discrete control and power circuits. Diagrams shall be ladder type schematic diagrams similar to the typical diagrams shown in the drawings, but shall include all devices requiring electrical connections. Panel control diagrams shall identify all wire numbers and types, terminal numbers, tag numbers, and PLC input/output I/O identification (rack and slot) numbers. Control diagrams shall show all circuits individually; no common diagrams will be allowed. Line numbers and sheet numbers shall reference relay contacts. Where multiple relays are required, their coils shall be wired parallel. All discrete devices shall be labeled to define their switching action (close on rising or close on falling process variable.
11. Shop drawings and catalog material for all control and field panels, instrument racks, and enclosures. Drawings shall be to scale and shall show the location of all panel mounted devices as well as doors, louvers, and sub-panels. Drawings shall include a panel legend and a bill of materials. The panel legend shall list and identify all front of panel devices by their assigned tag numbers, all nameplate inscriptions, service legends, and annunciator inscriptions. The bill of materials shall list all devices mounted within the panel that are not listed in the panel legend, and shall include the tag number, description, manufacturer, and model number for each.
12. Drawings showing any modifications or additional details as may be required to supplement the Contract Documents and adequately define the installation of the PCS elements
13. Interconnecting wiring diagrams that follow the format shown on the drawings, showing all component and panel terminal board identification numbers and external wire numbers in the same format as shown on the drawings. Wiring tables or wire lists will not be considered as a suitable substitute for these
08/19/132047 40 95 13-3 Panels and Hardware
drawings unless approved by the District. These diagrams shall include all intermediate terminations between field elements and panels (e.g., terminal junction boxes, motor control centers, etc.). These diagrams shall be coordinated with the electrical subcontractor and shall bear a statement that thishas been done. Reference the drawings for a typical interconnecting wiring diagram showing the format to be used. These drawings shall be provided to the electrical subcontractor for wiring system coordination and shall be used to provide wire numbers on the field wiring that is identical to the panel wire number. When wire numbers are not shown on the drawings, the Contractor shall contact the District to obtain wire numbers.
14. Loop diagrams that shall consist of an individual wiring diagram for each analog loop showing all devices in the loop, wire and terminal numbers, the location of the dc power supply, instrument tag numbers and descriptions, scale ranges, calibration data, and the location of any common dropping resistors, fuses, shield grounds, etc. The loop diagrams shall be in the format as shown on the drawings. The loop diagrams shall meet the minimum requirements of ISA S5.4 plus the following requirements:
15. Physical drawings showing equipment arrangement and terminal block locations.
16. A listing of all the panels, racks, instruments, PLCs, servers, OIUs, and equipment supplied as a part of the Process Control Panel. All components shall be grouped by component type. The list shall be submitted in electronic format in a Microsoft Access
17. Catalog information, descriptive literature, wiring diagrams (showing internal wiring and external connections for power and signal), and shop drawings for all recorders, indicators, transmitters, primary elements, flowmeters, PLCs, I/O modules, networking equipment and appurtenances, and all other components of the Process Control Panel. Also, provide catalog information on all electrical devices furnished under this Division (for example: power supplies, relays, surge suppressors, terminal blocks, circuit breakers, heaters, thermostats, fans, louver kits, etc.).
18. Equipment seismic qualifications, seismic calculations, and anchorage details as specified in this Section and Section 01 43 11.
19. Thermal load calculations.
20. Complete installation and field assembly instruction manuals.
21. As-built documents and Operation and Maintenance (O&M) manuals.
22. Spare parts list, expendables, and test equipment list.
08/19/132047 40 95 13-4 Panels and Hardware
23. Certified factory test reports.
24. Test procedures including: factory demonstration test, functional test,performance test, and commissioning
25. Test documentation including: factory demonstration test, functional test, performance test, and commissioning
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Control panels shall be shipped directly to the site from the factory. Before the control panels are shipped, remove all case-mounted instruments from the face of the panels, and repack in their original shipping cartons for shipment to the site with the control panel
B. Throughout this contract, the Contractor shall provide protection for materials and equipment against loss or damage and from the effects of weather. Prior to installation, store items in indoors in a dry location and follow all manufacturers' storage instructions. Provide heating in storage areas for items subject to corrosionunder damp conditions. Provide covers for panels and other elements that may be exposed to dusty construction environments. Specific storage requirements shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations of the equipment being provided.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental
1. Ambient temperature range: 0 to +47 degrees Celsius.
2. Ambient humidity range: 5 percent – 95 percent RH non-condensing.
3. Atmosphere: No corrosive gases.
1.6 MAINTENANCE
A. Extra materials:
1. Provide 10 spare fuses for each size and type used in the panel.
2. Provide 5 spare control relays for each size and type used in the panel.
3. Provide 5 spare amber LED indicating lights.
4. Provide 5 spare red LED indicating lights.
5. Provide 5 spare green indicating lights.
6. Provide 10 spare diodes used for PLC and RTU digital outputs.
08/19/132047 40 95 13-5 Panels and Hardware
7. Provide 1 spare DC to DC converter (48 VDC to 24 VDC).
8. PLC Modules: PLC extra materials are specified in Section 40 94 43.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, the control panels shall be constructed with external dimensions as shown on the drawings. The panel construction and all interior wiring shall be in strict accordance with the standards listed in part 1.2, Quality Assurance. Instrument arrangement shall be as shown, with minor modifications as may be required for the particular equipment furnished. Modifications shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer
B. The construction of the control panels shall be by a UL listed Industrial Control Panels Fabricator. The panel shall be completely fabricated, instruments installed, wired, and plumbed at the Fabricator’s factory. The same Fabricator shall fabricateall control panels. Unless otherwise indicated, provide all new materials and equipment, free from any defects, and suitable for the space provided. Provide materials and equipment listed by UL wherever standards have been established by that agency.
C. The control panels shall conform to UL listing 508 and bear a UL 508 label stating "suitable for use as an industrial control panel", or built by an UL listed shop.
D. Where two or more units of the same class of materials or equipment are required, provide products of a single manufacturer. Component parts of materials or equipment need not be products of the same manufacturer.
E. Standard products: Unless otherwise indicated, provide material and equipment that is the standard product of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such materials and equipment. Provide the manufacturer's latest standard design that conforms to the specifications.
2.2 TYPICAL EQUIPMENT
A. Construction:
1. For cabinets located indoors, cabinet shall be NEMA Type 12, manufactured with 12-gauge steel, with ANSI 61 gray polyester powder paint external finish.Cabinet dimensions are as shown on the design drawings. Include back panelsand side panels as shown on the drawings.
2. For cabinets located outdoors, cabinet shall be NEMA Type 4X, manufactured with 14-gauge Type 316L stainless steel, complete with back panel. Cabinet dimensions are as shown on the design drawings. Include back panels and side panels as shown on the drawings. Cabinets located outdoors shall be supported
08/19/132047 40 95 13-6 Panels and Hardware
by a unistrut metal frame and mounted at the height shown on the design drawings.
3. Seams shall be continuously welded and ground smooth without holes or knockouts.
4. The enclosure shall have a single hinged door. When facing the front of the enclosure, the hinge shall be on the left-hand side and the door latch on the right-hand side.
a. Door shall have heavy-duty continuous hinges, with lockable three-point latch.
b. Door gaskets shall be of oil resistant material and shall be attached with oil-resistant adhesive.
5. Each enclosure shall be provided with a print pocket 12" wide x 12" high x 2" deep provided on door.
6. Acceptable products: For wall mounted enclosures, Hoffman Concept wall-mount enclosure, with Hoffman Concept back panel, or equal as approved by the Engineer.
7. Acceptable products: For pad mounted enclosures, Hoffman free standing type 12 enclosure, with Hoffman side and back panels, or equal as approved by the Engineer.
B. Wiring:
1. Single conductor wiring shall be No. 14 AWG stranded copper with 600 volt Type MTW insulation unless otherwise specified and as follows:
a. 48V DC power supply wiring shall be 600V, Type MTW, No. 12 AWG stranded copper.
b. 24V DC power supply wiring from the power supply output to the individual distribution circuit breakers shall be 600V, Type MTW, No. 12 AWG stranded copper.
2. Reference Section 26 05 19 – Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables for general conductor color coding requirements.
3. Wiring to receptacles shall be No. 14 AWG stranded black (line), white (grounded neutral), and green (ground).
4. Instrumentation cables shall be as specified in Section 26 05 19 – Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables.
08/19/132047 40 95 13-7 Panels and Hardware
5. No more than 2 wires shall be connected to one terminal.
6. Wires carrying instrument and control D.C. signals shall be physically separated a minimum of 6" from wires carrying A.C. (120 VAC).
7. All wiring shall be neatly routed in wiring ducts and labeled with their assigned wire numbers. Wire labels shall be machine printed, permanent type heat shrinkable polyolefin labels, Brady Permasleeve printable wire markers, or equal as approved by the Engineer.
8. Instruments with grounding terminals shall be grounded to the panel steel. Provide grounding lug for grounding the console to earth ground.
9. Wire termination:
a. Screw type terminals: wires terminated on screw type terminal blocks shall be made of 105 degrees C nylon insulated, crimp-on terminals with fork-type tongue for screw-type terminals, AMP, Inc., or Thomas & Betts Co. Sta-Kon, or equal as approved by the Engineer.
b. Screw clamp terminals: wires terminated on screw clamp terminal blocks such as relays, switches, control units and devices, and power supplies shall be made with plastic insulating color coded collar ferrules. Use twin plastic insulated ferrules for connecting two wires to a single terminal block. Acceptable products: Phoenix Contact Type AI and AI-TWIN, or equal as approved by the Engineer.
Ferrule Color Coding
AC, Power and Controls Gray
DC, Controls and Instruments Red
DC Power Black
Use only manufacturer approved crimping tool designed specifically for the type of ferrule provided.
10. Open-slot-wiring duct sized for the application shall be provided to hold the wires neatly in place. Wiring duct covers shall be hinged. Provide one-inch minimum wire bending radius to prevent wires from being kinked or stressed at the wiring duct junctions. Wiring duct sizes shown on the drawings are minimum sizes; wiring duct fill shall not exceed 50 percent.
11. Whenever there is any discrepancy between wiring drawings and the control schematic, the control schematics shall take precedence.
08/19/132047 40 95 13-8 Panels and Hardware
C. Control units and devices:
1. Terminal blocks: Shall be tubular clamp rated 600 VAC/VDC minimum and as specified on drawings. If fuse terminal blocks are specified, they shall be with built-in puller and with fuse size as shown on drawings. Provide 20percent spare terminals for every terminal strip, space permitting. Terminals shall be clearly and permanently labeled with embossed numbers as shown on drawings.
2. Terminal block jumpers: Where indicated on the drawings, terminal block jumpers shall be pre-made specifically designed for the application. Jumpers designed to screw in on top of terminal blocks are preferred.
3. Provide all necessary accessories, partition plates, separating plates, end cover, group markers, etc., as required for proper installation of the terminal blocks.
4. Standard control terminal blocks:
a. Standard control terminal blocks shall be designed to accept No. 22 to No. 12 AWG wires. Terminal blocks shall be gray colored and rated for 30 amperes, 600 VAC/VDC.
b. Terminal blocks for analog 4-20mA circuits shall be knife-style isolation (circuit disconnect) type.
c. Acceptable products (Allen-Bradley part numbers are listed; or equal as approved by the Engineer ):
1) End Anchor: Allen Bradley 1492-EA35.
2) End Barrier (Single Circuit Terminal Blocks): Allen-Bradley 1492-EB3.
3) End Barrier (Two Circuit Terminal Blocks): Allen-Bradley 1492-EBD3.
4) End Barrier (Grounding Terminal Blocks): Allen-Bradley 1492-EB3-Y.
5) Group Marker: Allen-Bradley 1492-GM35.
6) Fuse Block: Allen-Bradley 1492-H5.
7) Single Circuit Terminal Block: Allen-Bradley 1492-W4.
8) Two Circuit Terminal Block (For digital I/O field wiring interface applications only): Allen-Bradley 1492-WD4.
08/19/132047 40 95 13-9 Panels and Hardware
9) Knife-Style Isolating Terminal Block (For analog 4-20mA or 1-5VDC applications only): Allen-Bradley 1492-WKD3.
10) Grounding Terminal Block: Allen-Bradley 1492-WG4.
11) Side Jumpers: Allen-Bradley 1492-N49.
12) Center Jumpers: Allen-Bradley 1492-CJ6-XX (where XX is the number of poles).
13) Marking Systems (1492-W4 and 1492-WG4 terminal blocks):Allen-Bradley 1492-SM6X12 (snap-in marker cards) or Allen-Bradley 1492-MP-X (individual marker tabs where X is the number, letter, or symbol required).
14) Marking Systems (1492-WD4 terminal blocks):Allen-Bradley 1492-SM6X9 (snap-in marker cards) or Allen-Bradley 1492-MP-X(individual marker tabs where X is the number, letter, or symbol required).
15) Marking Systems (1492-WKD3 terminal blocks):Allen-Bradley 1492-SM5X9 (snap-in marker cards) or Allen-Bradley 1492-MP5-X(individual marker tabs where X is the number, letter, or symbol required).
16) Marking Systems (1492-H5 fuse blocks):Allen-Bradley 1492-SM8X12 (snap-in marker cards).
5. Heavy Duty Terminal Block shall be designed to accept wires up to No. 10 AWG. Terminal blocks shall be gray colored and rated for 30 amperes, 600 VAC/VDC. Acceptable products: Allen Bradley 1492 W6, Phoenix Contact Universal “UK” Terminal Blocks, or equal as approved by the Engineer.
6. Din rail mounted circuit breakers shall be the high density, 2-pole, energy limiting type rated 250VAC or 120VDC, with current ratings as shown on the drawings. Acceptable products: Allen Bradley 1492-GH (250VAC) and 1492-CB Series B (120VDC), or equal as approved by the Engineer.
7. Molded case circuit breakers shall be panel mountable, 2-pole, energy limiting type rated 250VAC or 120VDC, with current ratings as shown on the drawings. The molded case circuit breaker shall have an integral padlockable handle which will allow the circuit breaker to be locked in the off position. The manufacture of the locking device shall be the same manufacture of the molded case circuit breaker. Molded case circuit breaker shall be in accordance with requirements and type specified in Section 26 24 16 Panelboards.
08/19/132047 40 95 13-10 Panels and Hardware
8. Pilot Devices
a. Pushbuttons
1) 30.5 mm diameter, NEMA 4X, momentary contact, extended head, number of contact blocks as specified or as indicated on the drawings, with finger guard terminals
a) Allen-Bradley 800HC-BR1D1 (“Start” pushbutton, 1 NOcontact block, green cap), Allen-Bradley 800HC-BR6D2(“Stop” pushbutton, 1 NC contact block, red cap).
b) Or equal as approved by the Engineer.
b. Combination indicator light/pushbutton
1) 30.5 mm diameter, NEMA 4X, 24VDC, LED lamp, momentary contact, extended head, number of contact blocks and lens color as specified or as indicated on the drawings, with finger guard terminals.
2) Acceptable products:
a) Allen-Bradley 800HC-QRBH24RD1 (“Trouble” pushbutton/light, 1 NO contact block, red lens).
b) Or equal as approved by the Engineer.
c. Selector switches
1) 30.5 mm diameter, NEMA 4X, maintained contact, standard knob with white insert, finger guard terminals, number of positions and contact development as shown on the drawings.
a) Allen-Bradley 800HC-HR2A (2 position, 1-NO – 1-NC contact configuration).
b) Or equal as approved by the Engineer.
d. Indicator lights
1) 30.5 mm diameter, NEMA 4X, 24VDC, LED push-to-test lamp, with finger guard terminals, color as specified or as indicated on the drawings.
2) Acceptable products:
08/19/132047 40 95 13-11 Panels and Hardware
a) Allen-Bradley 800HC-QRTH24A (amber), 800HC-QRTH24G (green), 800HC-QRTH24R (red).
b) Or equal as approved by the Engineer.
e. Push-pull operators
1) 2-position push-pull/twist to release, NEMA 4X, maintained contact, with two contact blocks unless otherwise specified or as indicated on the drawings, finger guard terminals.
2) Provide a protective guard to avoid unintentional tripping of E-stop push-pull operators.
a) Allen-Bradley 800HC-FRXT6A5 (“E-Stop”, red cap, 2-NCcontacts with operator in the “out” position).
b) Allen-Bradley 800T-N310 (protective guard for push-pull operator with stainless steel finish).
c) Or equal as approved by the Engineer.
f. Potentiometers
1) 30.5 mm diameter, NEMA 4X, 1k ohm resistance.
2) Acceptable products:
a) Allen-Bradley 800H-UR13.
b) Or equal as approved by the Engineer.
g. Legend plates
1) Provide matching legend plates for the pilot devices specified in this Section. Legend plates shall be white with black letters except for the E-stop legend plate which shall be yellow with black letters.
2) Acceptable products:
a) Allen-Bradley 800H-W500 (white/black normal legend plates), Allen-Bradley 800H-W500J (white/black jumbo legend plates), Allen-Bradley 800H-W797A (yellow E-stop legend plates),Allen-Bradley 800H-W080E (custom legend with graduated markings showing a range of 0-20 MGD and title “FLOW SP”).
b) Or equal as approved by the Engineer.
08/19/132047 40 95 13-12 Panels and Hardware
9. 24V DC Control Relays:
a. DIN rail mounted PLC discrete output interposing relay with 24VDC coil, DPDT contact rating of 10 amperes at 250VAC, and on/off indicatorlight.
1) Acceptable products:
a) Control Relay: Phoenix Contact No. 2967620, or equal as approved by the Engineer.
b) Plug-In Jumper: Phoenix Contact No. 2966838 (length as required), or equal as approved by the Engineer.
c) Separation Plate: Phoenix Contact No. 2966841, or equal as approved by the Engineer.
10. 120V AC Control Relays:
a. DIN rail, finger-safe, socket-mounted compact power relay with 120VACcoil, 4PDT contact rating of 10 amperes, and on/off indicator light.
1) Acceptable products:
a) Idec RH-4-B-L-AC120V (4PDT, blade terminal, indicator light option, 120VAC coil voltage) with finger-safe DIN rail mount socket SH4B-05C
b) Or equal as approved by the Engineer.
11. Analog Signal Converters
a. Potentiometer to voltage
1) 0- sensor input from potentiometer, 0-10 VDC output for connection to PLC analog input, 24 VDC powered, with screw connectors.
2) Acceptable products:
a) Weidmuller Pro RTD 1000, order number 8679490000.
b) Or equal as approved by the Engineer.
12. DC to DC Converter (48 VDC to 24 VDC):
a. Switched-mode DC to DC converter, power supply with 24 VDC to 72 VDC input, 12 VDC to 48 VDC output. Output shall be adjustable and regulated 1.0 VDC above or below the standard output voltage. Output
08/19/132047 40 95 13-13 Panels and Hardware
current capability shall be 20 A continuous / 25 A peak at 24VDC nominal output voltage.
b. The power supply shall have an efficiency greater than 85 percent at maximum output, with maximum peak-to-peak voltage ripple of less than 50mV.
c. Power supply shall have the following status signals:
1) Audible and visual indicators for constant current, low input voltage, low output voltage, and overtemperature.
2) Dry contact output fail relay.
d. Provide the following options:
1) Integrally mounted digital volt/ammeter.
2) Conformal coating.
e. Acceptable products: Analytic Systems VTC615 with digital volt/ammeter and conformal coating options, or equal as approved by the Engineer.
13. Electromechanical Timeswitch
a. Shall be a 24 hour dial.
b. Clock motor shall have a rating of 125V, 60 Hz.
c. The switch shall be SPDT and rated for 2 hp.
d. Provide up to 10 ON/OFF operations each day with minimum ON/OFFoperations of 1 hour and maximum ON time of 20 hours.
e. Provide a minimum of 16 hours of spring wound carryover formaintaining preset schedules and time during power failures.
f. Acceptable products
1) Intermatic Inc. Model # T171CR
2) Or equal as approved by the Engineer.
08/19/132047 40 95 13-14 Panels and Hardware
14. Cabinet Door Switch:
a. Cabinet door switch shall be rated for 15 amperes at 120 VAC and 0.5 amperes at 24 VDC, plunger-type door switch, SPST.
b. Acceptable products: Honeywell Microswitch Model 1AC2, or equal as approved by the Engineer.
15. Cabinet Light:
a. Energy efficient fluorescent luminaire with one F15 T8 lamp, white baked enamel housing, white acrylic diffuser, and UL listed for damp locations. The luminaire shall be undercabinet style for surface mounting at the top inside of a control panel.
b. The light shall turn on and off via the integral plunger switch.
c. Acceptable products: Hoffman model ALF16D18R, or equal as approved by the Engineer.
16. Convenience Receptacle:
a. Fully enclosed, DIN-rail mounted, GFI duplex utility receptacle, suitable for either vertical or horizontal mounting, rated 15A at 120VAC.
b. Acceptable products: Phoenix Contact Model EM-DUO-120/15/GFI, or equal as approved by the Engineer.
17. Surge Suppressor:
a. Surge suppressors shall be UL listed and consist of a removable plug and a hardwired base element that accepts wire sizes from No. 20 AWG to No. 2 AWG. Units shall be DIN-rail mounted.
b. Units shall be rated for 120 VAC nominal, 150 VAC maximum and 15kA nominal, 40kA maximum surge current (8/20us).
c. Acceptable products: Phoenix Contact Valvetrab or equal as approved by the Engineer. Valvetrab system part numbers are listed below:
1) Line-Neutral: 120VAC to neutral plug VAL-MS 120 ST Model 2807586; Base element VAL-MS-BE Model 2817741.
2) Neutral-Ground Base and Plug: F-MS 12/FM Model 2817974.
08/19/132047 40 95 13-15 Panels and Hardware
18. Fuses
a. Time delay glass tube construction with nickel plated brass endcaps, 1/4” x 1-1/4” size, for use in Allen-Bradley 1492-H5 fuse blocks.
b. Provide fuse sizes as shown on the drawings.
c. Acceptable products: Bussman MDL or equal as approved by the Engineer.
19. Ground Bar
a. Ground bars shall be UL listed and have suitable number and size of terminals necessary for terminating stranded copper ground wires.
b. Acceptable products:
1) Bus bar base: Phoenix Contact Model No. 0404428.
2) Bus bar terminal blocks: green/yellow color, rated for 76A, Phoenix Contact Model No. 0423027.
3) Copper bus bar: 1/8” x 3/8” tin-plated, Phoenix Contact Model No. 0402174.
4) Or equal as approved by the Engineer.
20. Panel Exhaust Fan and Fan Thermostat
a. Panel exhaust fan shall be UL listed and powered form 120VAC.
b. Shall have integrated cover grill and removable filter.
c. Shall include external thermostat with an adjustable range from 30 DEGF to 140 DEGF.
d. Panel exhaust fan shall be sized according to panel cooling requirements.
e. Acceptable products (Fan): Hoffman Series SF-05 filter fan package, catalog No. SF0516002, or equal as approved by the Engineer.
f. Acceptable products (Thermostat): Hoffman Temperature Control Switch. Hoffman catalog No. ATEMNO, or equal as approved by the Engineer.
21. Panel Heater
a. Panel heater shall be UL listed and powered from 120VAC.
b. Integrated thermostat adjustable from 0 DEGF to 90 DEGF.
08/19/132047 40 95 13-16 Panels and Hardware
c. 200 watt heating capacity.
d. Acceptable products: Hoffman electric heater, catalog No. DAH2001A, or equal as approved by the Engineer.
22. Nameplates
a. Nameplates shall be provided as shown on the drawings, as specified in this Section, and as specified in Section 26 05 53 – Identification for Electrical Systems.
2.3 FIBER OPTIC CABLE PATCH PANELS
A. Refer to Section 27 11 19 Communications Terminal Blocks and Patch Panels for fiber optic cable patch panel requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install equipment specified above as shown on the drawings. Follow all manufacturers’ instructions when installing PLCs, networks, and accessories.
3.2 FACTORY QUALITY CONTROL
A. All factory testing shall be in accordance with Sections 01 75 17 Field Testing and Startup and 40 80 00.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. All field testing shall be in accordance with Sections 01 75 17 and 40 80 00.
END OF SECTION
08/19/132047 40 95 13-17 Panels and Hardware
SECTION 41 22 13.13
OVERHEAD BRIDGE CRANES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 QUANTITY AND LOCATIONS
A. Furnish, install and test one 3-ton electrified overhead, top-running, double girderbridge crane and crane runway rails in accordance with these specifications and the project drawings. Refer to drawing 2117-S-004.
1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
A. Section 01 33 00 – Submittals
B. Section 01 43 11 – Seismic Requirements
C. Section 01 45 27 – Shop Inspection
D. Section 01 75 17 – Field Testing and Startup
E. Section 01 79 00 – Demonstration and Training
F. Section 01 91 13.10 – Asset Identification Tags
G. Section 05 12 00 – Structural Steel Framing
H. Section 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications
I. Section 09 96 56.05 – Hi Build Epoxy Coatings
J. Section 26 05 00 – Common Works Results for Electrical
K. Section 26 05 83 - Low Voltage Motors
1.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. CMAA No. 70, “Specifications for Top-Running Bridge and Gantry Type Multiple Girder Electric, Overhead Traveling Cranes”.
B. ASME B30.2-2005. “Overhead and Gantry Cranes (Top Running Bridge, Single or Multiple Girder, Top Running Trolley Hoist)”.
C. Crane Service Class: CMAA No. 70, Class A.
D. Wire Rope Hoist Service Class: ASME HST-4-1999 Class H1 and ASME B30.16; see data sheet.
E. NFPA 70, “National Electric Code”.
08/19/132047 41 22 13.13 -1 Overhead Bridge Cranes
F. NEMA Standards Publication MG-1, “Motors and Geneators”.
G. Building Clearances: Note limits on Drawings and as specified herein.
H. Safety of Operation and Accessibility: OSHA 29 CFR 1910.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings:
1. Make, model, weight, and horsepower of each equipment assembly.
2. Complete catalog information, descriptive literature, materials of construction, and specifications on bridge drive system, end trucks, runway stops, wheels, shafting, drive motor, gears and bearing, steel framing, trolley drive system, hoist motor and assemblies, hook, brakes, starting system, 2-speed contactors,conductors (bus bar, festoon), pendant controls, remote control system, and accessories.
3. Structural design calculations for runway beams and support system and calculations of deflection and loads on building structural components.Include calculations for basis of design of electrification system mounting brackets and concrete anchors. All certified correct by a registered professional engineer with a minimum 5 years experience.
4. Detailed Shop Drawings of crane runways, brackets, hangers, and their attachments to the building concrete structure including electrification systemmounting details. Shop Drawings shall include weld symbols for all welds in accordance with AWS A2.4.
5. Power and control wiring diagrams, including terminals and numbers.
6. Motor nameplate data in accordance with NEMA MG 1 and include any motor modifications.
7. Factory finish system.
8. Provide amperage and voltage drop calculations as the basis of sizing the electrification system.
B. Quality Control Submittals:
1. Factory Functional Test Report.
2. Special shipping, storage and protection, and handling instructions.
3. Manufacturer's printed installation instructions.
4. Manufacturer’s field training lesson plans (see section 01 79 00)
08/19/132047 41 22 13.13 -2 Overhead Bridge Cranes
5. Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation.
6. Field Functional Test Reports and Logs.
7. Certified Crane Inspector’s Report.
8. Suggested spare parts list to maintain the equipment in service for a period of 1year. Include a list of special tools required for checking, testing, parts replacement, and maintenance with current price information.
9. List special tools, materials, and supplies furnished with equipment for use prior to and during startup and for future maintenance.
10. Operation and maintenance manuals.
1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Temperature: Maximum 110 degrees F; minimum 33 degrees F.
B. Humidity: 0 to 90 percent.
C. Seismic Zone: Refer to section 01 43 11.
1.6 SPARE PARTS
A. Manufacturer’s recommended spare parts for first year of service.
B. Manufacturer’s special tools.
C. Manufacturer to submit recommended parts list during Submittal approval process.
1.7 QUALITY CONTROL
A. The District intends to perform shop inspection of the crane. See Section 01 45 27 for Shop Inspection Requirements. The intent is all welds will be inspected by District, prior to application of any coatings. Mechanical and Electrical components will also be inspected.
B. The crane will be fully inspected by District after installation and before acceptance.
C. The crane shall be inspected by, tested and certified by an independent 3rd party crane certification agency, in accordance with OSHA regulations.
1.8 MANUFACTURER’S FIELD SERVICES:
A. Manufacturer’s Representative: the Contractor shall furnish the services of a factory trained field representative designated by the equipment/system manufacturer, who shall be present at the project site to provide the services listed below. The manufacturer’s representative shall have superior knowledge of all aspects of the equipment/system being furnished in this section. The manufacturer through their
08/19/132047 41 22 13.13 -3 Overhead Bridge Cranes
field representative shall advise the Contractor and the Engineer of the proper procedures for each of the services listed.
B. Training Services: the manufacturer’s representative shall be present at the site and classroom designated by the Engineer, for the minimum number of days listed below.
Minimum Total Time
(Person-Days*)
Manufacturer's Service
1 Installation assistance and certification.
1/2 Field testing and startup (see Section 01 75 17 for additional requirements)
Training of District personnel: See Section 01 79 00 for additional requirements.
* The person-days shown are total days for each service listed. One person-day is equivalent to 8 hours. The person-days shown are the minimum days required for each service, and travel time to and from the site and/or classroom is not included.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. The crane shall comply with OSHA 29 CFR 1910. The crane shall comply with all “shall statements” and “should statements” of the applicable design codes listed in the design requirements. The crane shall be an electrically powered top running bridge, double girder, electrically powered top running trolley and electric wire rope hoist type.
B. Crane manufacturer shall furnish a coordinated operating system for two speed or VFD drives with pendant control system.
C. Rated Capacities and Speeds: The rated capacities (100 percent) in tons of 2,000 pounds and corresponding rated speeds (plus or minus 10 percent), shall be as follows:
08/19/132047 41 22 13.13 -4 Overhead Bridge Cranes
Device - Capacity: Rated Speeds (all motors two speed):
(Note: see 2.9.C for motor controls )
Bridge - 3 Tons 45 / 15 feet per minute (2 speed or VFD)
Trolley- 3 Tons 33 / 11 feet per minute (2 speed or VFD)
Hoist - 3 Tons 15 / 5 feet per minute (2 speed or VFD)
2.2 SUPPLEMENTS
A. See supplements to this section for additional requirements.
2.3 RUNWAY
A. Provide runway rails, crane stops, conductors, brackets, and attachment hardware. Structural components shall be in accordance with Section 05 12 00, Structural SteelFraming.
B. The runway rails shall be A.S.C.E. Rail, 40# / yard.
C. Crane bridge runway electrification shall be enclosed safety type copper busbar system, located on east side of building. See the Drawings.
2.4 BRIDGE
A. Provide girders from structural shapes proportioned to resist vertical, lateral, and torsional forces.
B. Construct bridge end trucks in accordance with CMAA No. 70. End trucks shall have rail sweeps and impact-absorbing bumpers.
C. End trucks shall be of four or eight wheel design.
D. Install runway end stops and bridge bumpers designed for the collision forces specified in ASME B30.17. The center of the end stop strike area shall match the bridge bumper height and shall not engage the wheels. The end stops shall be located so that the crane will provide the required hook coverage while maintaining required clearances from obstacles.
E. Layout of components on the bridge, such as motor controls, motors, reduction gears, electrification system shall be such as to allow access for maintenance.
F. Clearances, wheel loads, and tolerances shall be in accordance with CMAA No. 70.Wheels shall be rolled or forged steel with heat treated treads and flanges with a minimum tread hardness of 350 Brinell. The wheel axles shall be fabricated from alloy steel and machined to receive inner bearing races. Use rotating axles and wheels mounted by press fit and keys.
08/19/132047 41 22 13.13 -5 Overhead Bridge Cranes
G. The crane bridge shall have a dual motor drive, one motor for each runway’s wheel drive assembly. Each motor shall be coupled to the truck wheels via a gearbox mounted on the truck frame.
H. Drive gears shall be helical, spur, or herringbone-type fabricated from rolled or cast steel with machine cut teeth.
I. Bearings shall be double row, spherical ball, combination radial thrust type, either pre-lubricated and sealed or fitted for pressure lubrication. Pressure lubrication fittings shall be accessible from a man-lift and clearly labeled with “grease here.”
J. Brakes shall be designed in accordance with ASME B30.17 with the additional requirement of a minimum brake torque rating of 100 percent of the full motor torque adjustable down to 50 percent. The additional requirement shall not dictate design if braking torque is less than specified per the above standard. Each drive shall be equipped with an electro-mechanical disc brake with a self return to ON manual release mechanism so that the bridge may be released by hand.
2.5 OVERHEAD BRIDGE CRANE TROLLEY
A. The frame shall be fabricated from structural steel shapes and designed to control deflection of the trolley assembly while transmitting the carrying load to the bridge rails.
B. Trolley shall top running, four wheel, single motor drive type with trolley brake. Crane trolley electrification shall be festoon type.
C. The drive shall consist of a trolley drive shaft, driven by a two speed electric motor through a gear reduction unit.
D. Wheels shall be rolled or forged steel within a minimum tread hardness of 250 Brinell. Wheel axles shall be alloy steel and machined to receive inner bearing races. Use rotating axles and wheels mounted by press fit and keys.
E. Drive gears shall be helical, spur, or herringbone-type fabricated from rolled or cast steel with machine cut teeth.
F. Bearings shall be combination radial and thrust type, double row, angular contact ball bearings or single-row tapered roller bearings. Bearings shall be prelubricated and sealed, or fitted for pressure lubrication. Pressure lubrication fittings shall be accessible from a manlift and clearly labeled with “grease here.”
G. Brakes shall be designed in accordance with ASME B30.17 with the additional requirement of a minimum brake torque rating of 100 percent of the full motor torque adjustable down to 50 percent. The additional requirement shall not dictate design if braking torque is less than specified per above standards. The drive shall be equipped with an electro-mechanical disc brake with a self return to ON manual release mechanism so that the trolley may be released by hand.
08/19/132047 41 22 13.13 -6 Overhead Bridge Cranes
H. Install trolley stops and bumpers designed for the collision forces specified in B30.17. The center of the stop strike area shall match the trolley bumper height and shall not engage the wheels. The stops shall be located so that the trolley will provide the required hook coverage while maintaining required clearances from obstacles. Note trolley stops specific to avoid HVAC ducts. See drawings.
2.6 HOIST
A. The hoist shall consist of a rope drum driven through gear reductions, load blocks, hook, hoisting rope, sheaves, hoist braking and overload limit device. The wire rope drum shall be designed so all wire rope is wound in a single layer and not less than two turns of wire rope remain on the drum when the hook is at its lowest position. Hoist shall be two part single reeving.
B. Hoist shall comply with ASME B30.16 and ASTM HST 4M Class H1 Standards.
C. Rope drum and surrounding members shall be constructed to minimize abrasion, crushing or jamming of hoist rope. The load blocks shall be steel, enclosed type. The hoisting rope shall be extra flexible, improved plow steel made especially for hoist service. The drum shall be fabricated from steel with machined helical grooves.
D. The hook shall be constructed with sufficient ductility to allow noticeable deformation before hook failure. The hook shall be equipped with a safety latch, be free to rotate 360 degrees with rated load and positively held in place with locknuts,collars or other devices.
E. The load block shall be constructed so the hook can be easily removed for inspection purposes.
F. Brakes shall be designed in accordance with ASME HST-4-1999 and B30.16 with the additional requirement of a minimum brake torque rating of 250 percent of the full motor torque. The additional requirement shall not dictate design if braking torque is less than specified per above standards. The brakes shall consist of oneelectro-mechanical disc type with manual lever self return to “ON” release mechanism, and one mechanical load brake so the load may be released by hand and allowed to gradually descend by gravity. Conical brakes are not allowed.
G. The hoist system shall include an overload limit device as described in CMMA specification No. 70, Article 4.3.
H. Hoist gear box cover shall include oil level sight gauge.
I. Hoist shall include an upper travel cutoff limit switch.
08/19/132047 41 22 13.13 -7 Overhead Bridge Cranes
2.7 ELECTRICAL
A. Provide electrical equipment including motors, motor controllers, pendant control, control systems, wire, and conduit. The bridge conductors may be removed for shipment.
B. Electrical shall be in accordance with NFPA 70, NEC Article 610 and CMAA Specification 70. All wires shall be numbered or tagged at connection points.
C. The crane shall be designed to operate on 480 V, three-phase, 60-hertz alternating current power in an indoor environment. The bridge crane control panel shall include a fused main disconnect switch or main circuit breaker and shall have provisions to be locked in the Open position.
D. Electrification System (Powerails).
1. The bridge crane power rail shall be a preassembled, enclosed 4 conductorsystem. The power rail system shall be located where shown on the Drawings,at both pumping plant sites.
2. Provide all necessary components of the power rail system including but not limited to; power feed devices, collectors, end caps/covers, brackets, anchor clamps and rails.
3. The power rail assembly shall be firmly anchored to the concrete wall via brackets at spacing recommended by the manufacture.
4. The collector bars shall be sized based on the total load of the bridge crane system and per the requirements of NEC, Section 610.
5. Power rails shall be as manufactured by Vahle, US Safety Trolley or Approved Equal.
E. Bus-way shall include door bus-way to permit insertion or removal of trolleys.
F. Bridge and trolley conductor voltage drops from runway supply taps shall permit the crane motors to operate within voltage tolerances of plus or minus 10 percent, when building supply voltage is at plus or minus 5 percent of design voltage.
G. The festooned flat cable conductors for trolley electrification shall be a flexible cable, carried by heavy-duty roller with permanently lubricated roller bearings on a monorail support system that will dispense and retrieve the flexible cable without twisting or tangling with 20 percent spare conductor in each cable assembly.
H. Grounding: External in accordance with NFPA 70, NEC Article 250. Bridge and trolley frames shall be grounded with a separate conductor and not by means of the wheels and tracks.
08/19/132047 41 22 13.13 -8 Overhead Bridge Cranes
I. The crane system supplier shall coordinate the power requirements with the power source (distribution panelboard feeder breaker) and make sure the feeder breaker is coordinated with the main circuit breaker or switch in the bridge crane control panel.
2.8 MOTORS
A. The bridge and trolley drive motors shall be crane duty rated, and shall be two speedoperated with speeds noted in 2.9.C, with rated load.
B. The hoist motor shall be hoist duty rated, and shall be two speed operated with speeds noted in 2.9.C, with rated load.
C. All motors shall be totally enclosed non-ventilated (TENV). The motor insulation shall be Class F or better rated and shall be thermally protected with sensors embedded in the motor windings.
D. All motors shall have a 30-minute (minimum) duty rating.
E. The motors shall run smoothly, without torque pulsation at the lowest speed, and shall be energized at a frequency not exceeding 60 hertz at rated speed.
2.9 CONTROLS
A. Each crane function shall have a separate and independent drive unit with a motor circuit protection device.
B. All enclosures shall be rated NEMA 12 or greater.
C. The controllers for the bridge, trolley drive and hoist mechanisms shall each be two-speed type, NEMA rated contactors and be integral with the unit. Each motor/ gear drive shall be sized to provide sufficient starting torque for initiation of motion of the crane mechanism from standstill with rated load on the hook.
1. The bridge drive shall provide two speeds or variable speed capable of; 45 feet per minute and 15 feet per minute.
2. The trolley drive shall provide two speeds or variable speed capable of; 33 feet per minute and 11 feet minute.
3. The hoist drive shall provide two speeds or variable speed capable of; 15 feet per minute and 5 feet per minute.
D. Dynamic braking shall be provided for each drive. The hoist, trolley, and bridge electro-mechanical brakes shall set after the associated controller decelerates the motor to a controlled stop. All electro-mechanical brakes shall set upon loss of power.
08/19/132047 41 22 13.13 -9 Overhead Bridge Cranes
E. The main disconnect switch or main circuit breaker at the control panel shall disconnect all power to the crane system. Under voltage protection shall disconnect the crane upon loss of utility power and shall not allow reconnection until an operator resets the system via a keyed reset switch located in the crane control panel.
F. Two upper limit switches shall be provided for the hoist. The primary limit switch shall allow the operator to lower the hook only. Lowering the hook past the primary limit switch shall cause the primary limit switch to automatically reset. The secondary limit switch shall open all input power conductors to the motor drive and set the brake. Power shall be returned via a keyed, spring returned to normal bypass switch located on the pendent. Once power is restored operation shall be limited to the down direction until the primary limit switch is reset. The primary limit switch shall be set at the maximum practical hook height. The secondary switch shall be set at a distance equal to the primary limit switch height plus the distance required for the hook to coast to a stop from full rated speed with no load.
G. The pendant shall have spring loaded cable reel to accommodate the various elevations required for operation, i.e. from mezzanine (upper) level and main pump floor (lower level). Length of pendant shall be such that bottom of pendant is threefeet above lower level floor when fully extended.
H. A lower limit switch shall be provided for the hoist. The lower limit switch shall be set at the lowest practical hook height and when reached shall allow the operator to raise the hook only. Raising the hook past the lower limit switch shall cause the lower limit switch to automatically reset.
I. Provide pendant control station suspended from the bridge on its own independent trolley. Offset pendant a minimum of 6-foot distance from hook.
1. Heavy-duty, oil tight, pushbutton enclosure supported with chain or wire ropewith suitable strain relief grip.
2. Control cable attached to support chain or wire rope at not more than 6-foot intervals.
3. Momentary contact type pushbuttons for the following functions:
a. Main contactor ON/OFF.
b. Bridge NORTH and SOUTH with two speed control.
c. Trolley EAST and WEST with two speed control.
d. Main hoist UP and DOWN with two-speed control.
2.10 ACCESSORIES
A. The trolley and bridge shall include directional markings indicating building north, south, east, and west. The markings do not have to coincide with actual north but shall suit final building orientation. The markings shall match the labels on the pendent and remote control.
08/19/132047 41 22 13.13 -10 Overhead Bridge Cranes
2.11 FACTORY FINISHING
A. Prepare and prime coat in accordance with Section 09 91 00, Painting and Protective Coatings, System No. 6. Crane color shall be Federal Safety Yellow.
B. Crane capacity shall be stenciled in letters in black not less 12” in height on each side of bridge, close to center of the bridge.
2.12 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Factory Inspections: Supplier shall inspect equipment for required construction, electrical connection, and intended function.
B. District Inspection: See Section 01 45 27 for General Shop Inspection requirements and procedures. District shall be notified upon completion of all welding, prior to application of coatings. The District intends to inspect the crane after completion of welding. Coatings shall not be applied without written approval from District. The District shall also inspect Mechanical and Electrical Components of the crane including comparison of equipment provided against all submittals.
C. Factory Tests and Adjustments:
1. No-load run test all equipment furnished.
2. Hoist full rated load test in fabricator’s shop to ensure proper operation of trolley and bridge drives.
2.13 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS/ PRODUCTS, MOTORIZED OVERHEAD CRANES
A. Craneworks Inc., San Leandro, CA.
B. Heco Pacific Manufacturing Inc., Union City, CA.
C. Craneworks Inc., San Leandro, CA.
D. Allied Crane Co., Pittsburg, CA.
E. ACCO / Wright Hoists & Crane Components.
F. Yale Hoists
G. Or equal as approved by the Engineer.
2.14 ASSET IDENTIFICATION TAGS
A. Provide tags per Section 01 91 13.10, Asset Identification Tags.
08/19/132047 41 22 13.13 -11 Overhead Bridge Cranes
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install and test in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions, the project drawings and these specifications.
B. Provide lubricants.
C. Install electrical powerail system per the manufactures recommendations and NEC Section 610. Refer to the electrical and mechanical drawings for location of the powerail.
3.2 FIELD FINISHING
A. Field Finish: Coating of all cranes shall be the system and color as designated on the “Finish, Coating and Color Schedule” on drawing 2117-Z-001.2.
B. Touch-up equipment as specified in Section 09 91 00, Painting and Protective Coatings, System No. 6.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. See Section 01 75 12, Field Testing and Start Up.
B. Functional Test: Conduct on each crane.
1. Alignment: Test complete assemblies for proper alignment and connection, and quiet operation.
C. Performance Test:
1. Conduct on each Pump Room overhead bridge crane, and beam/trolley in Camanche Lime Storage Room.
2. Load tests in compliance with OSHA, ANSI B30.11, and ANSI B30.16.
D. Inspection by Certified Crane Inspector. Provide letter of certification to the District.
3.4 SUPPLEMENTS
A. The supplements listed below, following “END OF SECTION,” are a part of this Specification. Also, see the project drawings.
1. Crane Data Sheet.
2. Induction Motor Data Sheets (three).
END OF SECTION
08/19/132047 41 22 13.13 -12 Overhead Bridge Cranes
X
X
X
X X XX
X X X
X3 X3 X3
X3 X3 X3
X X
X
Accessories:X Service Platform
Central Lubrication SystemX OSHA Operating and Safety Devices XX Manlift Accessible Grease Fittings
Notes:1. See Project drawing 2117-S-004 for clearances, lift distances, and details.2. "*" Indicates items to be completed by the Manufacturer and submitted for approval.3. Either type, two-speed or VFD, is acceptable. VFD speeed range shall encompass the 2 speeds shown.
Remote Controls:
Frequency Modulated (FM)
H3 (standard) H5 (severe)
H2 (light)H4 (heavy)
Bridge Drive System (CMAA): A1 A4
A2 A5
Model No.:
Rev/Date/By:
*
*
F (continuous)
2 SPEED START/STOP3 TONS
PENDANT
BRIDGE
Double Girder
A (standyby)C (moderate)E (severe)
B (light)D (heavy)F (continuous)
Top RunningLow Profile
Type:
Hand Operated, Chain
A (standard)C (moderate)E (severe)
H1 (standby)
*
Method of Control: Location of Control:
Required Not Required Equipment Capacity:
Single Girder
CRANE DATA SHEET
OVERHEAD TRAVELING CRANE
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
EL PORTAL RESERVOIR REHABILITATION ANDALMOND PUMPING PLANT REPLACEMENT
EAST BAY MUNICIPAL UTILITY DISTRICTALMOND PUMPING PLANT - SERVICE CRANE
2781-BAS-CRN-021
Project: Owner: Service: Equip. Tag Number:
Outdoors Indoors Equipment Location:
Not Required
Manufacturer:
Type:
Factory Testing:
Field Testing:
15/5 (2 speed) Constant Speed(s) with Soft-Start
B (light)
Motor hp:Electric Conductors:
Service Class (ANSI):
Type:
Constant Speed(s) with Soft-Start33/11 (2 speed) Speed(s) (fpm):
Variable Speed Drive (range above)
Hook Travel: See dwg1*
Electric Operated, Wire Rope
Constant Speed(s) with Soft-Start
HOIST
Required, Functional & Performance
*
TROLLEY
Underhung
Motor hp: *
Festoon
Infrared, line-of-sight
D (heavy)
Service Class (ANSI): Service Class (ANSI):
Underhung
Speed(s) (fpm): Speed(s) (fpm):45/15 (2 speed)
- Overload limit device - Upper travel cutoff limit switch - Pendant control with cable reel
Top Running
A3 A6
Motor hp: Main Runway Electric Conductors:
Bus Bar
Variable Speed Drive (range above)
Additional requirements:
1Number of Units:
2047 Overhead Bridge Cranes41 22 13.13
Power Supply:
Motor Spec: 26 05 83
08/19/13
Voltage (VAC): 460 VACPhase: 3
60Frequency (Hz):
Variable Speed Drive (range above) Hand Operated Hand Operated
SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
Bus Bar Cable Reel
Festoon Other
Wired
Project:Owner:Equipment Name:Equipment Tag Number(s):
Type: Squirrel-cage induction meeting requirements of NEMA MG 1Bridge drive includes two drive motors, one for each runway.
Manufacturer: For multiple units of the same type of equipment, furnish motors and accessories of a singlemanufacturerMotor shall have 30 minute (minimum) duty rating and NEMA Class "F" insulation.Hazardous Location: Furnish motors for hazardous (classified) locations that conform to UL 674 andhave an applied UL listing mark
Motor Horsepower: Guaranteed Minimum Efficiency at Full Load: percentVoltage: Guaranteed Minimum Power Factor at Full Load: percentPhase: Service Factor (@ rated max. amb. Temp.): 1.0Frequency: Enclosure Type:Synchronous Speed: rpm Mounting Type: Horizontal Vertical
Two speed motor Vertical Shaft: Solid Hollow
/ rpmConstant Horsepower Two speed motor 45 fpm, 14 fpm bridge speedVariable TorqueConstant Torque Thermal Protection:
Winding: One Two Space Heater: volts, single phaseOversize main terminal (conduit) box for motors
Current Draw____*____ Amps , Max Terminal for connection of equipment grounding wire in eachterminal box
Additional Motor Requirements: Section 26 05 00, Common Work Results for Electical
Special Features:
08/19/132047 41 22 13.13 Overhead Bridge Cranes
INDUCTION MOTOR DATA SHEET
1.15
Almond Pumping PlantEast Bay Municipal Utility District
Overhead Crane, Bridge Motors
* Max *460 VAC
360 HZ
*
*
TENV
* *
Note 2: See separate data sheets for trolley drive motor and hoist motor.
Type *120
Note 1: * indicates items to be completed by crane manufacturer.
X
X
X
XX
X
XX
Project:Owner:Equipment Name:Equipment Tag Number(s):
Type: Squirrel-cage induction meeting requirements of NEMA MG 1
Manufacturer: For multiple units of the same type of equipment, furnish motors and accessories of a singlemanufacturerMotor shall have 30 minute (minimum) duty rating and NEMA Class "F" insulation.Hazardous Location: Furnish motors for hazardous (classified) locations that conform to UL 674 andhave an applied UL listing mark
Motor Horsepower: Guaranteed Minimum Efficiency at Full Load: percentVoltage: Guaranteed Minimum Power Factor at Full Load: percentPhase: Service Factor (@ rated max. amb. Temp.): 1.0Frequency: Enclosure Type:Synchronous Speed: rpm Mounting Type: Horizontal Vertical
Two Speed Vertical Shaft: Solid Hollow
/ rpmConstant Horsepower Two speed motor, 33 fpm, 11 fpm trolley speedVariable TorqueConstant Torque Thermal Protection:
Winding: One Two Space Heater: volts, single phaseOversize main terminal (conduit) box for motors
Current Draw ___*____ Amps, Max Terminal for connection of equipment grounding wire in eachterminal box
Additional Motor Requirements: Section 26 05 00, Common Work Results for Electrical
Special Features:
08/19/132047 41 22 13.13 Overhead Bridge Cranes
Note 2: See separate data sheets for bridge drive motor and hoist motor.
Type *120
Note 1: * indicates items to be completed by crane manufacturer.
* *
60 HZ*
460 VAC3
*
TENV
INDUCTION MOTOR DATA SHEET
1.15
Folsom South Canal Pumping PlantsEast Bay Municipal Utility District
Overhead Crane Trolley Motor
* Max *
X
X
X
XX
X
XX
Project:Owner:Equipment Name:Equipment Tag Number(s):
Type: Squirrel-cage induction meeting requirements of NEMA MG 1
Manufacturer: For multiple units of the same type of equipment, furnish motors and accessories of a singlemanufacturerMotor shall have 30 minute (minimum) duty rating and NEMA Class "F" insulation.Hazardous Location: Furnish motors for hazardous (classified) locations that conform to UL 674 andhave an applied UL listing mark
Motor Horsepower: Guaranteed Minimum Efficiency at Full Load: percentVoltage: Guaranteed Minimum Power Factor at Full Load: percentPhase: Service Factor (@ rated max. amb. Temp.): 1.0Frequency: Enclosure Type:Synchronous Speed: rpm Mounting Type: Horizontal Vertical
Two Speed Motor Vertical Shaft: Solid Hollow
/ rpmConstant Horsepower Two speed motor, 15 fpm, 5 fpmVariable TorqueConstant Torque Thermal Protection:
Winding: One Two Space Heater: volts, single phaseOversize main terminal (conduit) box for motors
Current Draw: ______*___ Amps, Max Terminal for connection of equipment grounding wire in eachterminal box
Additional Motor Requirements: See Section 26 05 00 for Common Work Results for Electrical
Special Features:
08/19/132047 41 22 13.13 Overhead Bridge Cranes
Note 2: See separate motor data sheets for bridge and trolley drive motors.
Type *120
Note 1: * indicates items to be completed by crane manufacturer.
* *
60 HZ*
460 VAC3
*
TENV
INDUCTION MOTOR DATA SHEET
1.15
Folsom South Canal Pumping PlantsEast Bay Municipal Utility District
Overhead Crane Hoist Motor
* Max *
X
X
X
XX
X
XX
X
SECTION 43 21 13.15
IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Work included: Furnish and install, complete, constant speed, horizontal, end suction centrifugal pump for standby service water service, frame mounted, with motor and drip rim base, fully assembled, as specified herein and as shown on the drawings.
B. Related work specified elsewhere:
2. Section 01 75 17 – Field Testing and Startup.
3. Section 01 79 00 – Demonstration and Training.
4. Section 01 91 13.10 –Asset Identification Tags.
5. Section 03 62 00 – Non-Shrink Grouting.
6. Section 05 05 26 – Flange Bolting.
7. Section 09 96 56.05 – High-Build Epoxy Coatings.
8. Section 26 05 00 – Common Work Results for Electrical.
9. Section 26 05 83 – Low Voltage Motors.
10. Section 33 12 01 – Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods.
11. Section 40 20 20 – Mechanical Piping
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit the following prior to fabrication:
1. Dimensional drawings, catalog information, and materials of construction forpumps, motors, mechanical seal, base, and all appurtenances.
2. Pump performance characteristic curves plotting the following parametersversus flow rate in gallons per minute:
a. Head in feet.
b. Brake horsepower.
08/19/13 2047 43 21 13.15 - 1 In-Line Centrifugal Pumps
c. Net Positive Suction Head required (NPSHr).
d. Efficiency
3. Impeller diameter.
4. Motor nameplate data.
5. Maximum solid particle size.
B. Submit the following prior to shipment:
1. Factory performance test curves.
2. Hydrotest certificate.
3. Final O&M manuals.
C. Submit the following prior to contract completion:
1. Manufacturer's Certificate of Proper Installation.
2. Certified Field Test Reports.
1.3 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE (O&M) MANUALS
A. In addition to the requirements of Section 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures, provide the following:
1. All performance data.
2. Provide a copy of the equipment manufacturer's warranties.
3. Provide section dividers for the Field Test Reports and Manufacturer’sCertificate of Proper Installation (to be inserted by the District when available).
1.4 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
A. Manufacturer's representative shall be present at the site or classroom designated by the Engineer, for the minimum person-days listed, travel time excluded:
Person-Days Manufacturer's Service
1/2 Installation assistance, inspection, and certification.
1 Field testing and startup (see Section 01 75 17 for additional requirements)
08/19/13 2047 43 21 13.15 - 2 In-Line Centrifugal Pumps
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PUMP SUMMARY TABLE
Table A
In-line Centrifugal Pump Summary
Equipment ID Description Rated Flow1
(GPM)
Rated TDH1
(FT)
Motor HP
2781-CWS-PMP-121 Cooling Water Pump 100 50 3
Notes1/ The design point is a preliminary estimate and is dependent on the cooling water requirements of the approved TEWAC motor manufacturer. The final design point will be provided after approval of the TEWAC motor submittal.
2.2 SERVICE CONDITIONS
A. Service: Cooling water to TEWAC motor.
B. Liquid Pumped: Clear, cold, treated water (potable water).
C. Largest Solids Passing: 1/4”.
D. Pumping Temperature: 70 degrees F.
E. Specific Gravity, at 70 degrees F: 1.0.
2.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Guaranteed Performance:
1. Rated Capacity: Per Table A.
B. Minimum Pump Efficiency at Rated Capacity: 57 percent.
C. Brake Horsepower shall not exceed 110 percent of the nominal rating of motor at any point of curve above 67 percent of the design head.
D. Speed: 3600 rpm maximum.
2.4 PUMP CONSTRUCTION
A. Pump Type: Vertical, 180 degree in-line, single or multi-stage, floor mounted with stand or base flange. Assembled with motor and coupling and coupling guard.
08/19/13 2047 43 21 13.15 - 3 In-Line Centrifugal Pumps
B. Casing: Cast iron ASTM A48 or ductile iron.
C. Impeller: Enclosed type, bronze or stainless steel. Secure to shaft by key and self-locking nut, or capscrew and lock washer. Impeller shall be dynamically and hydraulically balanced. Impeller shall be factory trimmed to match the rated conditions.
D. Casing Wear Rings: Replaceable bronze or brass.
E. Shaft: Solid stainless steel, 300 series or 400 series, or carbon steel with bronze or stainless steel sleeve
F. Connections: Sizes 2” and smaller NPT threads or ASME flanges. Sizes 2.5” and larger shall be ASME flanges.
G. Mechanical Seal:
1. Provide a cartridge type single mechanical seal, non-pusher, single coil spring,with silicone carbide versus ceramic seal faces, John Crane Type 1100, orequal as approved by the Engineer.
I. Bearings: Outboard end, steel ball or roller thrust bearing; inboard end, steel ball or roller radial bearing. Grease lubricated. Rating Life B-10 (20,000 hours minimum) as defined by AFBMA Standards.
J. Bearing Lubrication: Lifetime sealed, greased.
K. Baseplate: Cast iron or heavy fabricated steel, with drip rim and grout holes. Factory mount pump and driver.
L. Coupling: Falk or Fast spring-grid or gear type flexible spacer coupling, with OSHA coupling guard.
2.5 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS
A. Grundfos CR Series
B. Goulds Pumps 3996 Series
C. Sulzer-Paco VL Series
D. Or equal as approved by the Engineer.
2.6 MOTOR
A. Motor shall be sized such that 110% of nominal HP is not exceeded at any point of pump curve.
B. See Section 26 05 83 for additional motor requirements.
08/19/13 2047 43 21 13.15 - 4 In-Line Centrifugal Pumps
2.7 FACTORY FINISH
A. Pump, motor, frame and baseplate shall be coated in accordance with Section09 96 56.05, High-build Epoxy Coatings.
2.8 FACTORY TESTS
A. Motor: in accordance with Section 26 05 83.
B. Pump: Performance test with minimum of five points. Curves shall be prepared for flow vs. head, flow vs brake horsepower, flow vs efficiency. Curves shall be submitted for approval prior to shipment.
C. Hydrotest: Casing shall be hydrotested at 200 psig minimum. Hydrotest certificate shall be submitted with performance test curves prior to shipment.
D. Vibration: Vibration levels measured at the pump and at the motor bearing frame/supports shall not exceed a velocity of 0.08 in/sec peak to peak at any discrete frequency.
2.9 PUMP NAMEPLATE
A. Nameplate shall include name of manufacturer, model, size, serial number, capacity (gpm), TDH and direction of rotation.
B. Nameplate shall be brass or stainless steel. Nameplate shall be secured to pump at easily viewed location with stainless steel screws.
2.10 SPARE PARTS AND SPECIAL TOOLS
A. Furnish the following securely packaged and labeled with component name and manufacturer’s model and part number:
Equipment Quantities
complete set gaskets and 0-ring seals 1
shaft sleeve (if applicable) 1
complete set shaft keys. 1
complete mechanical seal 1
case wear ring 1
impeller wear ring (if applicable) 1
one complete set of any special tools required to dismantle pump
1
08/19/13 2047 43 21 13.15 - 5 In-Line Centrifugal Pumps
2.11 ASSET IDENTIFICATION TAGS
A. Provide tags per Section 01 91 13.10, Asset Identification Tags.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Care during storage, installation, and lubrication shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, Section 33 12 01, and the project drawings. Mount pumps and drivers on concrete bases as shown on the drawings.
C. Adjust pump assemblies such that the driving units are properly aligned and plumb.
D. Anchor bolts shall be stainless steel, and shall be sized in accordance with the pump manufacturer’s drawings.
E. After the pump and driver have been set in position, aligned, and shimmed to the proper elevation, grout the space between the bottom of the baseplate and the concrete foundation with a poured, non-shrinking epoxy grout as specified in Section 03 62 00.
F. All strain from attached piping shall be eliminated from the pumps, and any evidence of pump or driver misalignment, noisy operation, or other signs of improper setting shall be corrected by the Contractor.
G. Field Finish: Coating of all pumps and motors shall be the system and color as designated on the “Finish, Coating and Color Schedule” on Drawing Z-001.2.
3.2 FIELD TESTING
A. Functional Test: The Contractor, assisted by the pump manufacturer’s field representative, shall conduct functional tests in accordance with Section 01 75 17.
B. Performance Test: The Contractor shall perform performance tests as noted below and Section 01 75 17.
1. Measure and record pump shut-off head. Value shall be within 5 percent ofperformance curve.
2. Measure and record motor draw amps. Value shall be within 5 percent ofestimated, based on measured head and calculated current based on BHP vs.head curve and measured voltage.
08/19/13 2047 43 21 13.15 - 6 In-Line Centrifugal Pumps
3. Vibration: Measure using District’s vibrometer. Peak to peak velocity shall notexceed value given in paragraph 2.8.D Factory Tests, of this Section. Recorddata in test record.
4. Insert results into the O&M manual.
END OF SECTION
08/19/13 2047 43 21 13.15 - 7 In-Line Centrifugal Pumps
A P P E N D I X A
FORMS AND SCHEDULES
ITEM TITLE PAGE
1. Submittal Log................................................................................................. A-1
2. Value Engineering Change Proposal ............................................................. A-3
3. Contract Change Order Form......................................................................... A-5
4. Release Form ................................................................................................. A-7
5. California Department of Industrial Relations "Public Works PayrollReporting Form" (Sample) ............................................................................ A-9
6. Escrow Agreements for Security Deposits in Lieu of Retention ................... A-11
7. Subcontractor Payment Report (Form P-047) .............................................. A-15
8. Concrete Data Sheet ....................................................................................... A-17
9. Motor Data Sheet ........................................................................................... A-19
10. Field Functional Test Data Form ................................................................... A-21
11. Asset List Sample Template and Instructions ................................................ A-23
12. Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation .......................................... A-25
13. Safe Work Permit .......................................................................................... A-27
14. O&M Manual Review Checklist ................................................................... A-39
15. Maintenance Summary Form ......................................................................... A-33
16. Pump Control Panel Acceptance Test Procedure Samples A & B ................ A-35
17. Flushing and Chlorination Checklist ............................................................. A-37
18. Flushing Sample Taps .................................................................................... A-39
19. Training Evaluation Form .............................................................................. A-41
20. Vertical Turbine Pumps Performance Test Forms ........................................ A-43
21. Photo Confidentiality Agreement .................................................................. A-45
08/19/13 Appendix A 2047 Forms and Schedules
Shop Dwg.
Catalog
Sample
Certificate
Test Data
Manual
Other
SU
BM
ITTA
L L
OG
(a)
ITE
MN
O.
M -
113
• 2
/01
SP
EC
. NO
.P
RO
JEC
T T
ITLE
DA
TE
SP
EC
.S
EC
TIO
N
(f)
(g)
AC
TU
AL
DA
TE
RE
C'D
.
O.E
.S.
NO
.
(h)
DA
TE
RT
ND
.
(e)
TY
PE
OF
SU
BM
ITT
AL
(d)
PLA
NN
ED
SU
BM
ITD
AT
E
(b)
(c)
DE
SC
RIP
TIO
NR
EM
AR
KS
(i)
A-1
VALUE ENGINEERING CHANGE PROPOSAL
SPECIFICATION NO. _________ DATE
PROJECT TITLE
CONTRACTOR __________________________________________________ VECP NO.
1. DESCRIPTION OF EXISTING CONTRACT REQUIREMENT:
2. DESCRIPTION OF PROPOSED CHANGE:
3. DISCUSSION OF DIFFERENCES BETWEEN EXISTING REQUIREMENTS ANDPROPOSED CHANGE: Give advantages and disadvantages of each, justify any changes tofunction or characteristics, and give effect of the change on performance of the item.
0A - 3 Appendix A
4. ANALYSIS: Identify and describe each part of the existing requirement which must be changedto implement this VECP, and recommend how to make such change.
5. LIFE-CYCLE COST EFFECTS: State the estimated effect of the proposed change on cost ofoperating and maintenance throughout the life-cycle of the item.
6. DEADLINE DATE FOR IMPLEMENTATION OF THIS VECP: State the latest time foracceptance of this VECP by the District in order to obtain maximum cost reduction duringremainder of contract.
7. TIME OF COMPLETION: State the effect on contract time of completion if this VECP isaccepted.
8. COST ANALYSIS:
a. Cost of performing the work in accordancewith existing requirement. Attach detailedbreakdown $__________
b. Cost of performing the work in accordancewith proposed VECP. Attach detailed breakdown. $__________
c. Gross Savings to the Contractor. $__________
d. Implementation Costs.
(1) Contractors Development andImplementation Cost. Attach detailed breakdown. $__________
(2) Estimated District Cost. $__________
9. ESTIMATED VALUE ENGINEERING SAVINGS $__________
10. ESTIMATED NET SAVINGS TO CONTRACTOR $__________(c. minus d. above)
0A - 4 Appendix A
CONTRACT CHANGE ORDEREFFECTIVE ONLY WHEN SIGNED BY THE DISTRICT
Project: CHANGEORDER NO.
DATEREQUESTED
BY
SPECIFICATION NO. PURCHASE ORDER NO.
Subject:
1. DESCRIPTION OF WORK TO BE DONE OR CHANGE TO BE MADE
2. PAYMENT TO BE MADE OR CREDIT TO BE TAKEN:
a. Fixed Price Adjustment ( agreed price or specified reimbursement)b. Force Account Work
3. TIME EXTENSION(S) GRANTED:
a. Indicate what time extension applies to.
CHANGE ORDER TOINCLUDE THESEAPPLICABLE ITEMS:
Page 5PARAGON Project Management System
CHANGE AMOUNT
INCREASED
DECREASED
NOTE:For the valuable consideration itemized in this change order, the contractor releases EBMUD from all claims whether known or not, for delay, disruption, acceleration,re-sequencing, overhead,or other impacts, arising out ofor resulting from the work or change described in this change order.
CONTRACTOR
ACCEPTED BY
CONTRACTOR'S SIGNATURE PRINTED NAME TITLE DATE
You are hereby directed to make the above described changes fromthe plans and specifications, or to do the above described work notincluded in the plans and specifications on your contract.
RECOMMENDED BY TITLE DATE
TITLE DATEAPPROVED BY
CHGO02-02-EBMUD Change Order Form
A – 7 Appendix A
R E L E A S E
FOR AND IN CONSIDERATION of the sum of _________________ ______ ($ ), (Contractor Name)
on behalf of itself and its subcontractors, material suppliers, officers, directors, shareholders, employees, representatives, partners, subsidiaries, affiliates, agents, insurers, sureties, successors and assigns (collectively "Contractor") hereby releases and discharges the East Bay Municipal Utility District and its officers, directors, employees, representatives, agents, insurers, sureties, successors and assigns from any and all claims, demands, actions, causes of action and obligations, including but not limited to all claims for direct expense, indirect expense and schedule impact of whatever nature, known or unknown, existing, claimed to exist or which can hereafter ever arise out of or result out of or result from or in connection with any event, transaction or occurrence which has occurred with respect to the ________ _ project under Specification _______ from the beginning of time to and including the date of execution of this release, excepting only the following claims:
[List claims or state “none”]
To the extent of the release provided for herein, Contractor waives any and all rights or benefits it may have under the terms of Section 1542 of the California Civil Code which provides as follows:
"A general release does not extend to claims which the creditor does not know or suspect to exist in his or her favor at the time of executing the release, which if known by him or her must have materially affected his or her settlement with the debtor."
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, said Contractor has executed this Release this ____ day of ______, 20___.
(SEAL) Contractor
By:
Title:
SAMPLE FORM(Reduced)
S =
STR
AIG
HT
TIM
E
*OTH
ER –
Any
oth
er d
educ
tions
, con
tribu
tions
and
/or p
aym
ents
whe
ther
or n
ot in
clud
ed o
r req
uire
d by
pre
vaili
ng
CER
TIFI
CA
TIO
N M
UST
be
com
plet
ed
Form
A-1
-131
(New
2-8
0)
O
= O
VER
TIM
E
wag
e de
term
inat
ions
mus
t be
sepa
rate
ly li
sted
. U
se e
xtra
shee
t(s) i
f nec
essa
ry
(S
ee re
vers
e si
de)
SD
I = S
TATE
DIS
AB
ILIT
Y IN
SUR
AN
CE
C
alifo
rnia
Dep
artm
ent
of
Indu
stria
l Rel
atio
ns
Page
___
___
of _
____
_
NA
ME
OF
CO
NTR
AC
TOR
:
CO
NTR
AC
TOR
'S L
ICEN
SE N
O.:
A
DD
RES
S:
O
R S
UBC
ON
TRA
CTO
R:
SP
ECIA
LITY
LIC
ENSE
NO
.:
PAY
RO
LL N
O.:
FOR
WEE
K E
ND
ING
:SE
LF-IN
SUR
ED C
ERTI
FIC
ATE
NO
.: PR
OJE
CT
OR
CO
NTR
AC
T N
O.:
(4)
DA
Y
(5)
(6)
WO
RK
ERS'
CO
MPE
NSA
TIO
N P
OLI
CY
NO
.: PR
OJE
CT
AN
D L
OC
ATI
ON
:
(2)
MT
WTH
F
SS
(9)
D
ATE
(1)
NA
ME,
AD
DR
ESS
AN
D
SO
CIA
L SE
CU
RIT
Y N
UM
BER
O
F EM
PLO
YEE
NO. OF WITH-HOLDING EXEMPTIONS
(3)
WO
RK
C
LASS
IFIC
ATI
ON
HO
UR
S W
OR
KED
EA
CH
DA
Y
TOTA
L H
OU
RS
HO
UR
LY
RA
TE
OF
PAY
(7)
GR
OSS
AM
OU
NT
EA
RN
ED
(8)
DED
UC
TIO
NS,
CO
NTR
IBU
TIO
NS
AN
D P
AY
MEN
TS
NET
WG
S PA
ID F
OR
W
EEK
CH
ECK
N
O.
TH
IS
PRO
JEC
T A
LL
PRO
JEC
TS
FED
. T
AX
FIC
A
(SO
C. S
EC.)
STA
TE
TA
XSD
I V
AC
/H
OLI
DA
YH
EALT
H
& W
ELF.
PEN
SIO
N
S
T
RA
ING
. FU
ND
A
DM
IN
DU
ES
TR
AV
/ SU
BS.
SAV
ING
S O
THER
* TO
TAL
DE
DU
C-
TIO
NS
O
TH
IS
PRO
JEC
T A
LL
PRO
JEC
TS
FED
. T
AX
FIC
A
(SO
C. S
EC.)
STA
TE
TA
XSD
I V
AC
/H
OLI
DA
YH
EALT
H
& W
ELF.
PEN
SIO
N
S
T
RA
ING
. FU
ND
A
DM
IN
DU
ES
TR
AV
/ SU
BS.
SAV
ING
S O
THER
* TO
TAL
DE
DU
C-
TIO
NS
O
TH
IS
PRO
JEC
T A
LL
PRO
JEC
TS
FED
. T
AX
FIC
A
(SO
C. S
EC.)
STA
TE
TA
XSD
I V
AC
/H
OLI
DA
YH
EALT
H
& W
ELF.
PEN
SIO
N
S
T
RA
ING
. FU
ND
A
DM
IN
DU
ES
TR
AV
/ SU
BS.
SAV
ING
S O
THER
* TO
TAL
DE
DU
C-
TIO
NS
O
TH
IS
PRO
JEC
T A
LL
PRO
JEC
TS
FED
. T
AX
FIC
A
(SO
C. S
EC.)
STA
TE
TA
XSD
I V
AC
/H
OLI
DA
YH
EALT
H
& W
ELF.
PEN
SIO
N
S
T
RA
ING
. FU
ND
A
DM
IN
DU
ES
TR
AV
/ SU
BS.
SAV
ING
S O
THER
* TO
TAL
DE
DU
C-
TIO
NS
O
PUB
LIC
WO
RK
S PA
YR
OL
L R
EPO
RT
ING
FO
RM
A-9
SAMPLE FORM(Reduced)
NOTICE TO PUBLIC ENTITY
For Privacy Considerations
Fold back along dotted line prior to copying for release to general public (private persons).
(Paper Size then 8-1/2 x 11 inches)
I, , the undersigned, am the (Name – print)
with the authority to act for and on behalf of (Position in business)
, certify under penalty of perjury (Name of business and/or contractor)
that the records or copies thereof submitted and consisting of (Description, number of pages)
are the originals or true, full, and correct copies of the originals which depict the payroll record(s)
of the actual disbursements by way of cash, check, or whatever form to the individual or
individuals named.
Date: Signature:
A public entity may require a stricter and/or more extensive form of certification.
A-10
ESCROW AGREEMENT FOR SECURITY DEPOSITS IN LIEU OF RETENTION
A - 11 Appendix A
This Escrow Agreement is made and entered into by and between East Bay Municipal Utility District whose address is 375 Eleventh Street, Oakland, California 94607 hereinafter called “Owner,” whose address is
hereinafter called “Contractor” and whose address is hereinafter called “Escrow Agent.”
For the consideration hereinafter set forth, the Owner, Contractor, and Escrow Agent agree as follows:
(1) Pursuant to Section 22300 of the Public Contract Code of the State of California, the Contractor has the option to deposit securities with the Escrow Agent as a substitute for retention earnings required to be withheld by the Owner pursuant to the construction contract entered into between the Owner and Contractor for in the amount of dated (hereinafter referred to as the “Contract”). Alternatively, on written request of the Contractor, the Owner shall make payments of the retention earnings directly to the Escrow Agent. When the Contractor deposits the securities as a substitute for the contract earnings, the Escrow Agent shall notify the Owner within ten days of the deposit. The market value of the securities at the time of the substitution shall be at least equal to the cash amount then required to be withheld as retention under the terms of the contract between the Owner and Contractor. Securities shall be held in the name of the East Bay Municipal Utility District, and shall designate the Contractor as the beneficial owner.
(2) The Owner shall make progress payments to the Contractor for those funds which otherwise would be withheld from progress payments pursuant to the contract provision, provided that the Escrow Agent holds securities in the form and amount specified above.
(3) When the Owner makes payment of retentions earned directly to the Escrow Agent, the Escrow Agent shall hold them for the benefit of the Contractor until the time that the escrow created under this contract is terminated. The Contractor may direct the investment of the payments into securities. All terms and conditions of this agreement and the rights and responsibilities of the parties shall be equally applicable and binding when the Owner pays the Escrow Agent directly.
(4) The Contractor shall be responsible for paying all fees for the expenses incurred by Escrow Agent in administering the Escrow Account and all expenses of the Owner. These expenses and payment terms shall be determined by the Owner, Contractor and Escrow Agent.
2047
ESCROW AGREEMENT FOR SECURITY DEPOSITS IN LIEU OF RETENTION
A - 12 Appendix A
(5) The interest earned on the securities or the money market accounts held in escrow and all interest earned on that interest shall be for the sole account of Contractor and shall be subject to withdrawal by Contractor at any time and from time to time without notice to the Owner.
(6) The Contractor shall have the right to withdraw all or any part of the principal in the Escrow Account only by written notice to the Escrow Agent accompanied by written authorization from the Owner to the Escrow Agent that the Owner consents to the withdrawal of the amount sought to be withdrawn by Contractor.
(7) The Owner shall have a right to draw upon the securities in the event of default by the Contractor. Upon seven days’ written notice to the Escrow Agent from the Owner of the default, the Escrow Agent shall immediately convert the securities to cash and shall distribute the cash as instructed by the Owner.
(8) Upon receipt of written notification from the Owner certifying that the contract is final and complete, and that the Contractor has complied with all requirements and procedures applicable to the contract, the Escrow Agent shall release to the Contractor all securities and interest on deposit less escrow fees and charges of the escrow account. The escrow shall be closed immediately upon disbursements of all monies and securities on deposit and payments of fees and charges.
(9) The Escrow Agent shall rely on the written notifications from the Owner and the Contractor pursuant to Sections (5) to (8), inclusive, of this agreement and the Owner and Contractor shall hold the Escrow Agent harmless from the Escrow Agent’s release, and disbursement of the securities and interest as set forth above.
(10) The names of the persons who are authorized to give written notice or to receive written notice on behalf of the Owner and on behalf of the Contractor in connection with the foregoing, and exemplars of their respective signatures are as follows:
2047
ESCROW AGREEMENT FOR SECURITY DEPOSITS IN LIEU OF RETENTION
A - 13 Appendix A
On behalf of the OWNER: On behalf of the CONTRACTOR:
East Bay Municipal Utility District ____________________________________ Company Name
Treasury Manager Title Title
Wanda Hendrix-Talley Name Name
Signature Signature
Address: Address:
375 Eleventh StreetOakland, CA 94607
Telephone: (510) 287-0231 Telephone: ( ) Fax: (510) 298-0293 Fax: ( )
On behalf of the ESCROW AGENT:
____________________________________ Company Name
Title
Name
Signature
Address:
Telephone: ( ) Fax: ( )
2047
ESCROW AGREEMENT FOR SECURITY DEPOSITS IN LIEU OF RETENTION
A - 14 Appendix A
At the time the escrow account is opened, the OWNER and CONTRACTOR shall deliver to the ESCROW AGENT a fully executed counterpart of this Agreement. IN WITNESS THEREOF, the parties have executed this Agreement by their proper officers on the date first set forth above.
OWNER: CONTRACTOR:
East Bay Municipal Utility District Company Name
Wanda Hendrix-Talley ____________________________________ Name Name
Treasury Manager Title Title
Signature Signature
2047
(SAMPLE)
(NOT TO SCALE)
Project Name:Construction Spec. No.:
Agreement Date:Notice To Proceed Date:
WMWW
EMMEMW
PRIME:
SUB:
$0 $0 $0 $0#DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0!
$0 $0 $0 $0#DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0!
$0 $0 $0 $0#DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0!
WMWW
EMMEMW
$0 $0 $0 $0#DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0!
Date Signature $0 $0 $0 $0#DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0!
$0 $0 $0 $0#DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0! #DIV/0!
Print Name
*If revised $ amount is less than original $ amount by 10% or more, include statement justifying reason(s) for
Ethnic Minority (EM)EM%
TOTAL PAYMENTS & TOTAL PERCENTAGESWhite Men (WM)
The undersigned verifies that the information provided is corrected.
WM %White Women (WW)
WW%
ORIGINAL DOLLAR AMOUNT
Submission Date:
SUBCONTRACTOR PAYMENT REPORT (P-047)This information reference data from the Contract Equity Program Summary (P-035
Project Completion Date:Original Contract Amount:Revised Contract Amount:
REVISED DOLLAR
AMOUNT*
TOTAL PAYMENTS TO
DATE
PROJECTED TOTAL PAYMENTSCITY STATE ZIP CODE WORK PERFORMEDBUSINESS
PHONE NO.BUSINESS NAME VENDOR ID NUMBER CONTACT NAME STREET ADDRESS
PAGE 1 SUB-TOTALS & PERCENTAGESWhite Men (WM)
WM %White Women (WW)
Ethnic Minority (EM)EM%
WW%
PROJECTED TOTAL PAYMENTSWORK PERFORMED
ORIGINAL DOLLAR AMOUNT
REVISED DOLLAR
AMOUNT*
TOTAL PAYMENTS TO
DATEBUSINESS NAME VENDOR ID
NUMBER CONTACT NAME STREET ADDRESS CITY STATE ZIP CODE BUSINESS PHONE NO.
A - 15
The
num
bers
on
the
left
refe
r to
the
corr
espo
ndin
g nu
mbe
r on
the
sam
ple
form
to th
e rig
ht.
Proj
ect N
ame:
Eac
h fil
e co
ntai
ns 2
5 S
ubco
ntra
ctor
Pay
men
t she
ets.
Con
stru
ctio
n Sp
ec. N
o.:
Agr
eem
ent D
ate:
1E
nter
Pro
ject
Nam
e (F
or C
onst
ruct
ion
Pro
ject
s, D
O N
OT
incl
ude
spec
ifica
tion
num
ber)
.N
otic
e T
o Pr
ocee
d D
ate:
2Fo
r Con
stru
ctio
n P
roje
cts
ON
LY -
Ent
er S
peci
ficat
ion
Num
ber.
WM
WW
3E
nter
Con
tract
Agr
eem
ent D
ate.
EM
ME
MW
4E
nter
Not
ice
To P
roce
ed D
ate.
PRIM
E:
9
5E
nter
Pro
ject
Com
plet
ion
Dat
e.SU
B:
23
6E
nter
the
Orig
inal
Boa
rd A
ppro
ved
Con
tract
Am
ount
.
7E
nter
Rev
ised
Con
tract
Am
ount
.
8E
nter
Dat
e Fo
rm P
-047
Was
Com
plet
ed.
9E
nter
Prim
e C
ontra
ctor
/Con
sulta
nt's
Bus
ines
s N
ame.
10Le
ave
Bla
nk -
For D
istri
ct U
se O
nly.
$0$0
$0$0
11E
nter
Prim
e's
Con
tact
/Pro
ject
Man
ager
Nam
e.#D
IV/0
!#D
IV/0
!#D
IV/0
!#D
IV/0
!
$0$0
$0$0
12 -
16E
nter
Prim
e's
Stre
et A
dres
s, C
ity, S
tate
, Zip
Cod
e, a
nd P
hone
Num
ber.
#DIV
/0!
#DIV
/0!
#DIV
/0!
#DIV
/0!
$0$0
$0$0
17E
nter
Des
crip
tion
of P
rime'
s W
ork
to b
e P
erfo
rmed
.#D
IV/0
!#D
IV/0
!#D
IV/0
!#D
IV/0
!
18 19E
nter
Prim
e's
Orig
inal
Dol
lar A
mou
nt.
22E
nter
Prim
e's
Pro
ject
ed T
otal
Pay
men
ts.
20E
nter
Prim
e's
Rev
ised
Dol
lar A
mou
nt.
23R
epea
t Ste
ps 9
- 22
for E
ach
Sub
cont
ract
or/s
ubco
nsul
tant
.
21E
nter
Prim
e's
Tota
l Pay
men
ts-to
-Dat
e.24
Rea
son(
s) fo
r Cha
nge
in
Sub
cont
ract
or/s
ubco
nsul
tant
'sD
olla
r Am
ount
, If A
pplic
able
.
Sub
mit
the
Exc
el fi
le e
lect
roni
cally
to th
e C
ontra
ct E
quity
(CE
) Offi
ce.
For q
uest
ions
, ple
ase
call
the
CE
Offi
ce a
t (51
0) 2
87-0
152.
CO
MPL
ETE
ALL
FIE
LDS.
pp
(,
Whi
te W
omen
, EM
M -
Eth
nic
Min
ority
Men
, and
EM
W -
Eth
nic
Min
ority
W
omen
).
24
*If r
evis
ed $
am
ount
is le
ss th
an o
rigin
al $
am
ount
by
10%
or m
ore,
incl
ude
stat
emen
t jus
tifyi
ng re
ason
(s) f
or c
hang
e.
2 4
BU
SIN
ESS
PHO
NE
NO
.
SUB
CO
NT
RA
CT
OR
PA
YM
EN
T R
EPO
RT
(P-0
47)
This
info
rmat
ion
refe
renc
e da
ta fr
om th
e C
ontra
ct E
quity
Pro
gram
Sum
mar
y (P
-035
)
1Pr
ojec
t Com
plet
ion
Dat
e:5 6
3R
evis
ed C
ontr
act A
mou
nt:
7O
rigi
nal C
ontr
act A
mou
nt:
Subm
issi
on D
ate:
8
BU
SIN
ESS
NA
ME
VE
ND
OR
ID
NU
MB
ER
CO
NT
AC
TN
AM
EST
RE
ET
AD
DR
ESS
CIT
YST
AT
EZ
IP C
OD
EW
OR
KPE
RFO
RM
ED
OR
IGIN
AL
DO
LL
AR
AM
OU
NT
RE
VIS
ED
DO
LL
AR
AM
OU
NT
*
TO
TA
LPA
YM
EN
TS
TO
D
AT
E
PRO
JEC
TE
DT
OT
AL
PA
YM
EN
TS
1011
1213
1415
1617
1819
2021
22
EM%
Subc
ontr
acto
r Pay
men
t Rep
ort S
umm
ary
auto
mat
ical
ly ro
lls u
p th
e in
form
atio
n fro
m e
ach
Sub
cont
ract
or P
aym
ent R
epor
t (P
-047
) spr
eads
heet
.D
O N
OT
CH
AN
GE
THE
FOR
MU
LAS
ON
TH
ESE
PAG
ES.
INST
RU
CTI
ON
S
Form
P-0
47 -
1/22
/99
PAG
E 1
SU
B-T
OT
AL
S &
PE
RC
EN
TA
GE
S
Whi
te M
en (W
M)
WM
%
Whi
te W
omen
(WW
)
WW
%
Ethn
ic M
inor
ity (E
M)
A - 16
PROJECT PROJECT NO.
LOCATION DATE
STATION ELEVATION
WEATHER
CONTRACTOR SOURCE PLANT
LOAD NO. TAG NO. AD-MIX
SPECIFIED STRENGTH MIX NUMBER
SPECIMEN REPORTSPEC.
NO.TEST AGE
TIME MADE
CONC. TEMP.
AIR TEMP. SLUMP WORKABILITY
COMMENTS
CONSTRUCTION INSPECTOR
Concrete Data Sheet
08/19/132047 A - 17 Appendix A
MOTOR DATA SHEET – ALMOND PUMPING PLANT
Motor No.: Service:Horsepower *
SpeedSynchronous RPM *
Full Load RPM *Voltage *Phase *Frequency *Full Load Amps *Locked Rotor Amps *Secondary Amps *
Volts *Field Amps *
Volts *Power Factor (%) Efficiency (%) Full Load * *
75% Load * *50% Load * *
Torque Design (A B C D) *Starting Torque (% of Full Load) *Full Load Torque *Breakdown Torque (% of Full Load) *Load WK2 *Time Duty (Cont. or Time Rated) *
Insulation Class *Temperature Rise Over 40oC Ambient *Thermal Protection Required (Winding) *Enclosure *Frame Number *Horizontal or Vertical *Space Heaters Watts/Volts *Bearings *Rotation (Viewed From Shaft End) *Drive Connection *Slide Rails (Yes or No) *Power Factor Correction Capacitor (KVAR) *Service Factor *Starting Time @ Rated Voltage, Cold (40oC) Hot @ Rated Temp. Rise * *Allowable Time @ Locked Rotor at Rated Voltage, Cold (40oC) *Allowable Time @ Locked Rotor at Rated Voltage, Hot @ Temp. Rise *Shaft Diameter Length * *
Keyway *Motor Weight *Manufacturer *Outline Drawing *Serial Number *Surge Protection *Stator Shift *Approved By: Date Spec. No.Mechanical-Electrical- Item No.
IssueTo
Prelim.Issue
Apprv. Issue
Revisions
1 2 3 4 5Eng'gPurch.VendorField
Notes: N/A - NOT APPLICABLE * - DATA FURNISHED BY CONTRACTOR
07/02/12 A-19 Appendix A2047 Motor Data Sheet
FIEL
D F
UN
CTI
ON
AL
TEST
DA
TA F
OR
M
EB
MU
D P
roje
ct T
itle:
Test
Dat
e(s)
:
Equ
ipm
ent N
ame:
Sec
tion
No.
: Ta
g N
o.:
P&
ID N
o.
I. Pr
etes
t Doc
umen
tatio
n/Se
tup
Doc
umen
ts:
Yes
No
NA
Com
men
ts:
a)In
terc
onne
ctio
n &
Loo
p di
agra
ms
prov
ided
b)M
fr C
ert o
f Pro
per I
nsta
llatio
n pr
ovid
ed
c)Te
chni
cal S
ubm
ittal
com
plet
e
d)S
pare
Par
ts p
rovi
ded
e)Fi
nal O
&M
s pr
ovid
ed
f)Fa
ctor
y te
st re
ports
sub
mitt
ed
Fiel
d Te
st S
etup
:
II.Fi
eld
Func
tiona
l Tes
t1.
Cal
ibra
tion/
Loop
/Ele
ctric
alY
es N
o N
A C
omm
ents
: 1.
1 In
stru
men
t com
mis
sion
ing
com
plet
e; c
alib
ratio
n ta
gs a
pplie
d
1.2
Loop
Che
cks
com
plet
e
1.3
Elec
trica
l com
mis
sion
ing
com
plet
e
2.In
stal
latio
n C
heck
Pas
s Fa
il N
AC
omm
ents
:
2.1
Cor
rect
equ
ipm
ent t
ags
have
bee
n in
stal
led
2.2
3.O
pera
tions
Che
ckP
ass
Fail
NA
Com
men
ts:
3.1
3.2
4.C
ontr
ols
Che
ckP
ass
Fail
NA
Com
men
ts:
4.1
4.2
08/1
9/13
20
47A
- 21
FIEL
D F
UN
CTI
ON
AL
TEST
DA
TA F
OR
M
EB
MU
D P
roje
ct T
itle:
Test
Dat
e(s)
:
Equ
ipm
ent N
ame:
Sec
tion
No.
: Ta
g N
o.:
P&
ID N
o.
II.Fi
eld
Func
tiona
l Tes
t (C
ont.)
5.A
larm
s C
heck
Pas
s Fa
il N
A C
omm
ents
: 5.
1 C
orre
ct e
quip
men
t tag
s ha
ve b
een
inst
alle
d
5.2
6.R
un C
heck
Pas
s Fa
il N
AC
omm
ents
:
Sys
tem
was
suc
cess
fully
ope
rate
d fo
r (1
hou
r min
imum
= s
atis
fact
ory
chec
k)
7.O
ther
Tes
ts a
nd C
heck
sP
ass
Fail
NA
Com
men
ts:
7.1
7.2
III.P
artic
ipan
ts/W
itnes
sTe
st c
ondu
cted
:
By
(sig
natu
re):
Dat
e:
Title
: C
ompa
ny N
ame:
By
(sig
natu
re):
Dat
e:
Title
: C
ompa
ny N
ame:
EBM
UD
Witn
ess:
By
(sig
natu
re):
Dat
e:
Title
:
08/1
9/13
20
47A
- 2
AIM
ASS
ET U
PDA
TE T
EMPL
ATE
PAG
E 1
OF
2
ASS
ET IN
FOR
MA
TIO
N F
IELD
S
1a.
FAC
ILIT
YN
UM
BER
1b.
SYS
TEM
C
OD
E
1c.
EQU
IPM
ENT
CO
DE
1d.
EQU
IPM
ENT
ID N
UM
BER
1e.
OPT
ION
AL
MO
DIF
IER
(S)
2a. E
QU
IPM
ENT
TAG
2b. E
QU
IPM
ENT
NA
ME
(MA
X 26
C
HA
RA
CTE
RS
)
2c. T
AG
A
TTA
CH
MEN
T TY
PE
2d.
LETT
ERC
OLO
R
2e.
BA
CK
GR
OU
ND
CO
LOR
235
CA
PM
P05
62
235-
CA
-PM
P-0
56-2
ME
TER
ING
PU
MP
SS
T C
AB
LEW
HIT
EB
LUE
FSC
C C
A M
ETE
RIN
G P
UM
P
238
EP
SX
FR20
B23
8-E
PS
-XFR
-020
-BM
AIN
TR
AN
SFO
RM
ER
EP
OX
Y A
DH
ES
IVE
BLA
CK
OR
AN
GE
FSC
C E
PS
MA
IN T
RA
NS
FOR
ME
R
238
RW
SP
MP
020
123
8-R
WS
-PM
P-0
20-1
SU
MP
PU
MP
SS
T C
AB
LEB
LAC
KG
RE
EN
FSC
C R
WS
SU
MP
PU
MP
239
EP
SU
PS
002
RM
123
9-E
PS
-UP
S-0
02-R
M1
OP
S B
LDG
RM
1 U
PS
#2
EP
OX
Y A
DH
ES
IVE
WH
ITE
OR
AN
GE
FSC
C E
PS
OP
S B
LDG
RM
1 U
PS
#2
236
EP
SLP
000
723
6-E
PS
-LP
-001
-7S
H R
OO
M U
PS
NO
1E
PO
XY
AD
HE
SIV
EW
HIT
EO
RA
NG
EFS
CC
EP
S S
H R
OO
M U
PS
NO
1
008
QM
SA
IT54
5ATU
RB
008-
QM
S-A
IT-5
45A
-TU
RB
CA
NA
L IN
LET
TUR
BID
IME
TER
SS
T C
AB
LEW
HIT
EB
LUE
FSC
C Q
MS
CA
NA
L IN
LET
TUR
BID
IME
TER
1696
QM
SH
V02
5D
1696
-QM
S-H
V-0
25-D
FILT
ER
BU
ILD
ING
ISO
L V
ALV
ES
ST
CA
BLE
WH
ITE
BLU
EFS
CC
QM
S F
ILTE
R B
UIL
DIN
G IS
OL
VA
LVE
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
---
3. A
SSET
NA
ME
RE
FER
EN
CE
AP
PE
ND
IX A
AS
SE
T LI
ST
INS
TRU
CTI
ON
SH
EE
T A
ND
DR
AW
ING
949
2-G
-007
FAC
ILIT
Y N
AM
E:
1. E
QU
IPM
ENT
TAG
NU
MB
ERIN
G D
ETA
ILS
FOLS
OM
SO
UTH
CA
NA
L C
ON
NE
CTI
ON
2. T
AG
CR
EATI
ON
DET
AIL
S
FAC
ILIT
Y C
OD
E / A
BB
REV
IATI
ON
:FS
CC
A-
A-2
3
AIM
ASS
ET U
PDA
TE T
EMPL
ATE
PAG
E 2
OF
2
4a.
PAR
ENT
EQU
IPM
ENT
TAG
#
4b.
SYST
EMTA
G#
4c.
PAR
ENT
FAC
ILIT
Y#
235-
CA
235
12/1
5/20
06C
HE
MIC
AL
BLD
G20
67-J
-120
.1P
ULS
AFE
ED
ER
ISO
CH
EM
GM
6-A
DT-
TTF-
AV
3500
IWA
KI
925-
234-
6375
MA
RIU
S
BA
SO
ON
6/4/
1981
1959
-RW
S-S
WR
-001
238-
EP
S23
86/
2/20
11O
UTS
IDE
BLO
WE
R B
LDG
1685
-E-1
56.0
0G
EN
ER
AL
ELE
CZN
1311
76-J
U89
425
000
KO
HFL
ER
E
LEC
510-
256-
0954
JOH
N
JOH
NS
ON
5/4/
2014
238-
RW
S23
89/
20/1
991
CH
EM
ICA
L B
LDG
746-
J-11
0.3
WA
LLA
CE
& T
IER
NA
NE
NV
IRO
TUB
EA
T-32
029
4000
ME
RS
ON
, IN
209-
572-
0996
KIM
AN
EID
5.2.
2012
239-
EP
S-L
P-0
04A
239-
EP
S23
91/
20/2
009
ELE
CTR
IC 1
IN O
PE
RA
TIO
NS
BU
ILD
ING
1235
-E-2
15P
OW
ER
WA
RE
933
0E
V39
6AX
X02
UP
9876
480
00O
WE
RS
YS
TE92
5-23
4-87
12B
RA
D S
TAW
AE
T1/
3/20
13
236-
EP
S-X
FR-0
1223
6-E
PS
236
5/31
/200
7S
UR
GE
VA
ULT
400-
E-1
00P
OW
ER
SY
STE
MS
9837
672D
S07
G0E
R56
754
50E
LEC
TRO
LUX8
03-9
87-2
491D
AV
ID L
EIN
SK
Y4/
14/2
018
008-
QM
S00
83/
1/19
92C
LAY
STA
TIO
N17
64-J
-010
HA
CH
1720
E67
9856
3620
028
00J
CO
NTR
OLS
409-
563-
9876
KIM
RH
ILE
Y3/
21/2
013
1696
-QM
S-P
MP
-011
1696
-QM
S16
9611
/1/2
004
CA
MA
NC
HE
INTA
KE
STR
UC
TUR
E41
0-J-
010
HA
YW
AR
D12
JVE
HB
3030
125
OB
ER
DO
RFE
510-
578-
4690
AR
RE
L W
IRE
MA
9/30
/201
4
5. IN
-SER
VIC
E D
ATE
MM
/DD
/YYY
Y9.
MO
DEL
#
4. E
QU
IPM
ENT
HIE
RA
RC
HY
PLA
CEM
ENT
6. A
SSET
LO
CA
TIO
N8.
MA
NU
FAC
TUR
ERN
AM
E
11.
PUR
CH
ASE
PRIC
E
7. D
RA
WIN
G
NU
MB
ER
13.
VEN
DO
RPH
ON
E #
14.
VEN
DO
RC
ON
TAC
TN
AM
E
10. S
ERIA
L#
ASS
ET IN
FOR
MA
TIO
N F
IELD
S ( C
ON
TIN
UED
)
15.
WA
RR
AN
TYEX
PIR
ATI
ON
DA
TE
12.
VEN
DO
RN
AM
E
A-
A-
Pag
e 1
of 2
FAC
ILIT
Y N
AM
EEn
tere
d by
con
trac
tor.
Add
the
appr
opria
te fa
cilit
y na
me.
If p
roje
ct e
ntai
ls m
ore
than
one
faci
lity,
add
bot
h w
ith th
e pr
imar
y fa
cilit
y na
me
first
.FA
CIL
ITY
CO
DE
/ AB
BR
EVIA
TIO
NEn
tere
d by
con
trac
tor.
Add
the
appr
opria
te fa
cilit
y co
de o
r abb
revi
atio
n fo
r the
abo
ve F
acili
ty N
ame
(s).
Item
s 1
thou
gh 5
bel
ow a
re re
quire
d on
the
prel
imin
ary
Ass
et L
ist S
prea
dshe
et.
NO
TE: A
fter r
evie
win
g th
e lis
t of e
xam
ples
on
the
Ass
et L
ist S
prea
dshe
et, t
hey
may
be
rem
oved
.En
tere
d by
con
trac
tor.
Com
pone
nts
of th
e eq
uipm
ent t
ag n
umbe
r are
gen
erat
ed fr
om fi
elds
1a
to 1
e be
low
. A
ll eq
uipm
ent t
ag n
umbe
rs s
hall
be in
com
plia
nce
with
the
follo
win
g dr
awin
gs: 9
492-
G-0
01.2
, -0
02,
-006
, and
-00
7. A
ll ne
w ta
gs d
evel
oped
by
the
Con
tract
or m
ust b
e re
view
ed b
y th
e D
istri
ct fo
r com
plia
nce
with
Eng
inee
ring
Sta
ndar
d P
ract
ice
(ES
P) 1
30.0
.
Ente
red
by c
ontr
acto
r.A
two-
to-fo
ur d
igit
num
ber u
niqu
e to
the
Faci
lity
unde
r con
stru
ctio
n. O
ne e
xcep
tion
is to
use
sta
tion
num
bers
for r
emot
e aq
uedu
ct e
quip
men
t tha
t are
not
lo
cate
d at
a D
istri
ct fa
cilit
y.
Ente
red
by c
ontr
acto
r.A
two-
or t
hree
-lette
r cod
e us
ed to
iden
tify
the
prim
ary
syst
em to
whi
ch th
e eq
uipm
ent i
s as
soci
ated
. Thi
s is
foun
d in
the
refe
renc
ed d
raw
ing
of s
yste
m c
odes
an
d na
mes
- 94
92-G
-007
.EQ
UIP
ME
NT
TAG
NU
MB
ER
CO
DE
S A
ND
CO
LOR
S.
Ente
red
by c
ontr
acto
r.Th
is is
the
two-
or t
hree
-lette
r cod
e us
ed to
iden
tify
the
equi
pmen
t typ
e or
func
tion.
Ref
er to
Equ
ipm
ent C
odes
tabl
e on
dra
win
g 94
92-G
-006
for a
list
ing
of
com
mon
equ
ipm
ent c
odes
.
Ente
red
by c
ontr
acto
r.Th
e E
quip
men
t ide
ntifi
catio
n ( I
D )
num
ber i
s a
thre
e-di
git n
umbe
r tha
t ind
icat
es a
trai
n nu
mbe
r for
trai
n-re
late
d ite
ms,
a lo
op n
umbe
r for
wire
d in
stru
men
ts, a
se
quen
ce n
umbe
r for
non
-trai
n or
non
-loop
rela
ted
item
s or
ele
ctric
al e
nclo
sure
num
ber f
or m
ount
ed e
lect
rical
equ
ipm
ent t
ypes
.
Ente
red
by c
ontr
acto
r.Th
e M
odifi
er is
a le
tter o
r num
ber u
p to
thre
e ch
arac
ters
that
iden
tifie
s th
e se
quen
ce n
umbe
r for
trai
n- a
nd lo
op-r
elat
ed e
quip
men
t, or
oth
er d
escr
ipto
r. A
m
odifi
er is
not
requ
ired
for a
ll eq
uipm
ent t
ag n
umbe
rs. M
ultip
le m
odifi
ers
may
be
adde
d.
2.TA
G C
REA
TIO
N D
ETA
ILS
NO
EN
TRY
NEE
DED
. Aut
o ge
nera
ted
from
the
abov
e ite
ms
1a th
roug
h 1e
. 'F
FFF-
SS
S-E
EE
-III
I-M
MM
' w
here
:FF
FF =
FA
CIL
ITY
NU
MB
ER
SS
S =
SY
STE
M C
OD
EE
EE
= E
QU
IPM
EN
T C
OD
EII
II -
MM
M =
EQ
UIP
ME
NT
ID N
UM
BE
R A
ND
OP
TIO
NA
L M
OD
IFIE
R
2b. E
QU
IPM
ENT
NA
ME
Ente
red
by c
ontr
acto
r. N
OTE
: TH
IS F
IELD
IS L
IMIT
ED T
O 2
6 C
HA
RA
CTE
RS.
Bas
ic d
escr
iptio
n of
the
equi
pmen
t bei
ng ta
gged
. Som
e de
scrip
tion
in fr
ont o
f the
equ
ipm
ent t
ype
rela
ted
to it
s lo
catio
n or
func
tion
in th
e sy
stem
suc
h as
D
ISC
HA
RG
E P
RE
SS
UR
E S
WIT
CH
, UN
IT #
2 M
OTO
R S
TAR
TER
. S
ee th
e lis
t of e
xam
ples
in th
e A
sset
Upd
ate
Tem
plat
e.En
tere
d by
con
trac
tor.
Spe
cify
whe
ther
the
field
tag
will
be
form
atte
d as
'SS
T C
AB
LE' f
or c
abin
et ta
g or
'EP
OX
Y A
DH
ES
IVE
' for
han
ging
tag
s (s
ee S
ectio
n 01
91
13.1
0 A
sset
Id
entif
icat
ion
Tags
for a
ttach
men
t req
uire
men
ts).
Ente
red
by c
ontr
acto
r.R
efer
ence
Sta
ndar
d D
raw
ing
- E
quip
men
t Tag
Num
ber C
odes
and
Col
ors
9492
-G-0
07.
Ente
red
by c
ontr
acto
r.R
efer
ence
Sta
ndar
d D
raw
ing
- E
quip
men
t Tag
Num
ber C
odes
and
Col
ors
9492
-G-0
07.
This
fiel
d is
aut
omat
ical
ly fo
rmat
ted
and
crea
ted
by p
roce
edin
g fie
lds
and
shou
ld n
ot b
e m
anua
lly e
dite
d.
See
a li
st o
f exa
mpl
es o
n th
e A
sset
Lis
t Spr
eads
heet
.3.
ASS
ET N
AM
E
2a. E
QU
IPM
ENT
TAG
2c. T
AG
ATT
AC
HM
ENT
TYPE
2
d. L
ETTE
R C
OLO
R
2
e. B
AC
KG
RO
UN
D C
OLO
R
1
b. S
yste
m C
ode
( SSS
)
1
c. E
quip
men
t Cod
e ( E
EE )
1
d. E
quip
men
t ID
num
ber (
IIII
)
1
e. O
ptio
nal M
odifi
ers
( MM
M )
INST
RU
CTI
ON
S FO
R C
OM
PLET
ING
TH
E A
SSET
LIS
T SP
REA
DSH
EET
The
prim
ary
use
of th
e A
sset
Lis
t Spr
eads
heet
is fo
r inp
ut o
f fie
ld e
quip
men
t and
met
a-da
ta in
to th
e E
BM
UD
wor
k m
anag
emen
t sys
tem
. Mos
t fie
lds
foun
d in
the
Ass
et L
ist S
prea
dshe
et w
ill b
e en
tere
d as
sea
rcha
ble
data
for e
nd-u
sers
so
accu
racy
and
use
of r
efer
ence
d do
cum
ents
( su
ch a
s E
quip
men
t Tag
Num
berin
g C
odes
) ar
e im
porta
nt.
1.EQ
UIP
MEN
T TA
G N
UM
BER
ING
DET
AIL
S
1
a. F
acili
ty N
umbe
r ( F
FFF
)
A-
Pag
e 2
of 2
Ente
red
by D
istr
ict.
Par
ent e
quip
men
t can
be
a ph
ysic
al e
nclo
sure
suc
h as
a v
ault
or e
lect
rical
pan
el th
at c
onta
ins
asse
ts a
s 'c
hild
ren'
. P
aren
t equ
ipm
ent m
ay a
lso
be fu
nctio
nal
in-n
atur
e fo
r exa
mpl
e a
Pum
p be
ing
the
pare
nt to
the
mot
or a
nd in
stru
men
ts a
nd v
alve
s co
ntai
ned
on th
at tr
ain;
inst
rum
ent l
oops
whe
re th
e pa
rent
is th
e pr
imar
y in
dica
tor s
uch
as a
pre
ssur
e or
flow
tran
smitt
ers.
This
fiel
d is
aut
omat
ical
ly fo
rmat
ted
and
crea
ted
by p
roce
edin
g fie
lds
and
shou
ld n
ot b
e m
anua
lly e
dite
d.
See
a li
st o
f exa
mpl
es o
n th
e A
sset
Lis
t Spr
eads
heet
.Th
is fi
eld
is a
utom
atic
ally
form
atte
d an
d cr
eate
d by
pro
ceed
ing
field
s an
d sh
ould
not
be
man
ually
edi
ted.
S
ee a
list
of e
xam
ples
on
the
Ass
et L
ist S
prea
dshe
et.
Ente
red
by c
ontr
acto
r.Th
is is
the
antic
ipat
ed d
ate
that
the
faci
lity
will
be
oper
atio
nally
read
y. F
orm
at s
houl
d be
MM
/ D
D /
YY
YY
. The
act
ual i
n-se
rvic
e da
te s
hall
be a
fter a
ll te
stin
g ha
s be
en c
ompl
eted
incl
udin
g th
e st
artu
p te
st.
Ente
red
by c
ontr
acto
r.Th
is is
the
phys
ical
loca
tion
of th
e lis
ted
Equ
ipm
ent.
It w
ill b
e us
ed to
ass
ist i
n lo
catin
g th
e as
set a
nd is
ver
y va
luab
le. I
f the
ass
et is
diff
icul
t to
loca
te p
hysi
cally
or
vis
ually
, thi
s fie
ld c
an b
e as
spe
cific
as
nece
ssar
y.
Exa
mpl
es m
ay b
e Fa
cilit
y B
uild
ing
or ro
om n
ame,
stre
et c
ross
ings
, phy
sica
l acc
ess
desc
riptio
n i.e
. acc
ess
via
6th
floor
util
ity ro
om v
entil
atio
n et
c.
This
fiel
d le
ngth
is li
mite
d to
100
cha
ract
ers.
Ente
red
by c
ontr
acto
r.Th
e dr
awin
g nu
mbe
r tha
t sho
ws
the
Equ
ipm
ent T
ag. T
ypic
ally
list
ed o
n E
quip
men
t P&
ID o
r ele
ctric
al s
ingl
e-lin
e dr
awin
gs.
Ente
red
by c
ontr
acto
r.Th
is is
the
Man
ufac
ture
r Nam
e of
the
equi
pmen
t bei
ng li
sted
. Th
is fi
eld
is li
mite
d to
25
char
acte
rs.
Ente
red
by c
ontr
acto
r.Th
is is
the
Mod
el N
umbe
r of t
he e
quip
men
t bei
ng li
sted
. The
ser
ial n
umbe
r is
not t
o be
list
ed in
this
are
a.
Ente
red
by c
ontr
acto
r.Th
is is
the
Man
ufac
ture
r's S
eria
l Num
ber f
or th
e eq
uipm
ent b
eing
list
ed.
Ente
red
by c
ontr
acto
r.Th
is is
the
equi
pmen
t pric
e fo
und
on th
e B
OM
, for
exa
mpl
e. N
o sp
ecia
l cha
ract
ers
shou
ld b
e in
clud
ed in
this
fiel
d; n
o $,
com
ma
or d
ecim
als.
For
exa
mpl
e,
$3,5
00.2
4 sh
ould
be
ente
red
as 3
500.
The
pric
e sh
ould
onl
y be
for t
he e
quip
men
t bei
ng re
fere
nced
in th
e E
quip
men
t Nam
e fie
ld.
Ente
red
by c
ontr
acto
r.V
endo
r nam
e as
indi
cate
d fo
r the
pro
ject
. En
tere
d by
con
trac
tor.
Con
tact
pho
ne n
umbe
r for
the
vend
or li
sted
abo
ve.
Ente
red
by c
ontr
acto
r.C
onta
ct n
ame
for t
he v
endo
r lis
ted
abov
e.
Ente
red
by c
onst
ruct
ion
staf
f.Th
is is
the
war
rant
y ex
pira
tion
date
that
is s
peci
fied
per t
he c
ontra
ct. L
abel
as
MM
/ D
D /
YY
YY
.
14.V
END
OR
CO
NTA
CT
NA
ME
15.W
AR
RA
NTY
EXP
IRA
TIO
N D
ATE
10.S
ERIA
L #
11.P
UR
CH
ASE
PR
ICE
12.V
END
OR
NA
ME
13.V
END
OR
PH
ON
E #
6.A
SSET
LO
CA
TIO
N
7.D
RA
WIN
G N
UM
BER
8.M
AN
UFA
CTU
RER
NA
ME
9.EQ
UIP
MEN
T M
OD
EL #
4a. P
AR
ENT
EQU
IPM
ENT
TAG
#
4
b. S
YSTE
M T
AG
#
4
c. P
AR
ENT
FAC
ILIT
Y #
5.IN
-SER
VIC
E D
ATE
INST
RU
CTI
ON
S FO
R C
OM
PLET
ING
TH
E A
SSET
LIS
T SP
REA
DSH
EET
- Con
tinue
d
Item
s 4
thro
ugh
15 a
re n
eces
sary
for c
ompl
etio
n of
the
final
Ass
et L
ist S
prea
dshe
et.
4.EQ
UIP
MEN
T H
IER
AR
CH
Y PL
AC
EMEN
T
A-2
3A
-23
MANUFACTURER’S CERTIFICATE OF PROPER INSTALLATION
OWNER:______________________________ EQPT SERIAL NO.:_____________________
EQPT TAG NO.:________________________ EQPT/SYSTEM:________________________
PROJECT NO.:_________________________ SPEC. & SECTION:_____________________
I hereby certify that the above-referenced equipment/system has been:
Complete Not Applicable
Installed in accordance with Manufacturer’s recommendations.
Inspected, checked, and adjusted.
Serviced with proper initial lubricants.
Electrical and mechanical connections meet quality and safety standards.
All system instruments are calibrated.
All applicable safety equipment has been properly installed.
Comments:_____________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________
I, the undersigned Manufacturer’s Representative, hereby certify that I am (i) a duly authorized representative of the manufacturer, (ii) empowered by the manufacturer to inspect, approve, and operate the equipment and (iii) authorized to make recommendations required to assure that the equipment furnished by the manufacturer is complete and ready for startup and operations. I further certify that all information contained herein is true and accurate.
Date: ____________________________
Manufacturer: __________________________________________________________________
By Manufacturer’s Authorized Representative: ________________________________________ (Authorized Signature)
Manufacturer’s Certificate05/01/06 A- of Proper Installation
A-
Attachment A SAFE WORK PERMIT
Safe Work Permit
Location: Work Started Description of Work: Date:
Time:
Person Requesting Work:_________________________ Facility Representative:___________________________________
Personal Protective Equip : ______________________ _____________________________________________
EmergencyProcedures:___________________________________ ______________________________________________________
# SITUATION/CONDITION YES NO Maint. Initials
Unit Initials
WORK COMPLETED
Comments and Operations and Special Conditions:
Copies to: ORIGINAL to: Facility (Facility shall retain original for 90 days from date of work completion) YELLOW to: Maintenance (MS 55) PINK to: Water Treatment (MS 72) Goldenrod to: WHS (MS 704)
01/11/05
2047 Appendix A
O&M MANUAL REVIEW CHECKLIST(Manufacturer’s Representative to complete one form per submittal)
SPEC. SECTION TITLE & NO:
MFR Name, Address, Phone:
Local Rep Name, Address, Phone:
GENERAL FORMAT (See Section 01 33 00 for additional details)
DESCRIPTION PROVIDED?
COMMENTS YES NO
Specified copies provided
Binder cover clearly labeled
Spine Label
System/Equipment type clearly identified
District facility or facilities name(s) identified
Specification number & title shown
Title page provided
Equipment tag numbers correctly shown
Manufacturer’s name, address, phone number provided
Local Representative’s name, address, phone number provided
Table of contents provided
Heavy section dividers w/ numbered or lettered plastic tabs provided
Pages punched for 3-ring binder
Info larger than 8-1/2 x 11 folded showing title block
Original quality copies provided
TECHNICAL CONTENT (See Section 01330 for details)
DESCRIPTIONLOCATION IN O&M
COMMENTS TAB# PAGES N/A
Equipment DescriptionsEquipment names, model numbers & tag numbers
Equipment & major component functions
Drawings, diagrams & illustrations
Equipment Specification
Bill of materials
Performance InformationNameplate data
Performance test data/curves
Installation InstructionsInstallation procedures & drawings
07/02/12 O&M Manual 2047 A- 29 Review Checklist
TECHNICAL CONTENT (See Section 01330 for details)
DESCRIPTIONLOCATION IN O&M
COMMENTS TAB# PAGES N/A
Equipment tolerances
Adjustment procedures
Operating InstructionsStartup procedures
Normal & routine operations
Control functions
Alarms description and settings
Shutdown procedures
Emergency operations
Electrical Information
Nameplate data
Relay, control, alarm contact settings
Motor test data
Electrical DrawingsSingle-line diagrams, three-line diagrams
Interconnection wiring diagram
Schematic and elementary diagrams
Panel layout drawings
Instrumentation & ControlControl diagrams
Panel layout drawings
Instrument data sheets (specification forms)
Calibration Procedures
Final settings for adjustable control devices
Block diagrams and riser diagrams
Loop diagrams
Pneumatic/Hydraulic piping drawings
Hard copy printouts of control programs
Field calibration data sheets
Programming software (licensed to EBMUD) withuser manuals
Shipping and Storage InstructionsTesting
Factory Test Report (procedures and results)
Field Test Procedures
Manufacturer’s Certificate of Proper Installation(where specified)
Field Test Results
Troubleshooting guide
07/02/12 O&M Manual 2047 A- Review Checklist
TECHNICAL CONTENT (See Section 01330 for details)
DESCRIPTIONLOCATION IN O&M
COMMENTS TAB# PAGES N/A
Safety Safety procedures/Lockout discussion
CAUTION, WARNING, DANGER text
Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS)
Special safety equipment
Preventive MaintenanceMaintenance Summary Forms
Lubrication InformationLocation of lube points & frequency
Recommended type & grade, state specific MFR
Recommended viscosity & temperature range
Overhaul InstructionsDetailed assembly drawings w/OEM part numbers
Tear down/rebuild instructions
Spare Parts for Equipment & ComponentsPredicted life of parts subject to wear or aging
Recommended spare parts list w/ part numbers
Complete instructions for obtaining parts
Long-term storage requirements
Special tools
Long-term Shutdown/Lay-up Instructions
Warranty/Guarantee
07/02/12 O&M Manual 2047 A- Review Checklist
05/13/10 Typical MaintenanceA- Summary Form
TYPICAL MAINTENANCE SUMMARY FORM (Use as many pages as necessary. MS Word file available upon request)
1. Equipment Name:
2. Manufacturer:
3. Identification Numbers:
Tag:
Model:
Serial:
4. Nameplate Data (HP, voltage, speed, flow rate, head, etc.):
5. Manufacturer’s Local Representative:
Name:
Telephone:
Address:
6. LUBRICANT LISTReference Symbol Lubricant Description
List symbols used in Item 8 below
List equivalent lubricants: brand name(s), type, grade, viscosity, etc.
7. SPARE PARTS (Recommendation spare parts with part numbers; if any.)
8. Equipment Replacement Cost [$] ____________________________________
05/1
3/10
Typi
cal M
aint
enan
ceA
-Su
mm
ary
Form
9.M
AIN
TEN
AN
CE
RE
QU
IRE
ME
NTS
Mai
nten
ance
Tas
kFr
eque
ncy
Task
Dur
atio
nLu
bric
ant
Task
Det
ails
Loc
atio
nB
riefly
list
eac
h re
quire
d pr
even
tive
mai
nten
ance
act
ivity
List
requ
ired
frequ
ency
of e
ach
oper
atio
n (d
aily
, w
eekl
y, m
onth
ly,
annu
al, e
tc)
Tim
e ne
eded
to c
ompl
ete
each
task
(with
uni
ts:
hour
s, d
ays,
wee
ks, e
tc)
Ref
er b
y sy
mbo
l to
lubr
ican
t lis
t (It
em 6
)
List
O&
M M
anua
l Tab
and
pa
ge n
umbe
r whi
ch
prov
ides
add
ition
al d
etai
ls
on th
e m
aint
enan
ce a
ctiv
ity
I,
cer
tify
that
the
info
rmat
ion
on th
is fo
rm is
an
accu
rate
and
com
plet
e su
mm
ary
of a
ll ty
pica
l, ro
utin
e, a
nd
prev
entiv
e m
aint
enan
ce ta
sks
requ
ired
to e
nsur
e sa
tisfa
ctor
y pe
rform
ance
dur
ing
war
rant
y pe
riod
and
the
over
all l
onge
vity
of t
he e
quip
men
t or
syst
ems.
(Man
ufac
ture
r’s R
epre
sent
ativ
es S
igna
ture
) (D
ate)
AC
CE
PTA
NC
E T
EST
PR
OC
ED
UR
ESA
MPL
E “
A”
AC
CE
PTA
NC
E T
EST
PR
OC
ED
UR
E
PUM
P C
ON
TR
OL
PA
NE
L V
ISU
AL
INSP
EC
TIO
NSt
ep
No.
Ref
eren
ce
Dra
win
gPr
oced
ure
Rem
arks
Dat
eB
y
1E-
221
Che
ck a
ll as
sem
blie
s for
pro
per d
imen
sion
cle
aran
ces,
pain
t, an
d co
nfig
urat
ion
per r
efer
ence
dra
win
g.
2E-
221
Che
ck a
ll co
mpo
nent
s, in
stru
men
ts, d
evic
es a
nd e
quip
men
t per
late
st
bill
of m
ater
ial.
3E-
221
Ver
ify th
at a
ll te
rmin
al b
lock
s are
pro
perly
labe
led
with
spar
e te
rmin
als a
s per
dra
win
g.
4E-
221
Ver
ify th
at c
ircui
t bre
aker
sand
fuse
s are
of t
he c
orre
ct ra
tings
.
07/0
2/12
20
47Pu
mp
Con
trol P
anel
A
-35
AC
CE
PTA
NC
E T
EST
PR
OC
ED
UR
ESA
MPL
E “
B”
AC
CE
PTA
NC
E T
EST
PR
OC
ED
UR
E
PUM
P C
ON
TR
OL
PA
NE
L -
CO
NT
RO
L S
CH
EM
AT
IC A
ND
INST
RU
ME
NT
AT
ION
FU
NC
TIO
NA
L T
EST
Step
N
o.R
efer
ence
D
raw
ing
Ladd
er
No.
Proc
edur
eEx
pect
ed R
esul
tR
emar
ksD
ate
Insp
ecte
d B
y1
E-21
912
0A
pply
120
VA
C p
ower
to c
ontro
l pa
nel a
nd m
easu
re v
olta
ge a
t TB
1 te
rmin
als 2
thru
12
and
term
inal
“N
”
All
term
inal
s sha
ll be
at 1
20 V
AC
2E-
219
E-22
2 E-
222
122
2
92
-C
lose
circ
uit b
reak
er A
C-C
B1
- O
bser
ve P
LC in
put 1
X10
0 -
Mea
sure
vol
tage
at M
CR
rela
y te
rmin
als
-R
elay
“K
O”
will
ene
rgiz
e-
PLC
inpu
t *X
100
will
lit
- M
CR
rela
y w
ill re
set o
r te
rmin
als 1
4 an
d 10
will
be
24 V
DC
3E-
219
124
-C
lose
circ
uit b
reak
er A
C-C
B2
- M
easu
re v
olta
ge a
t rec
epta
cle
RC
L-2
-O
bser
ve c
ontro
l pan
el li
ght
- 12
0 V
AC
at R
CL-
2 -
Ligh
t tur
ns o
n w
hen
door
is o
pen
and
off w
hen
door
is c
lose
d4
E-22
2
E-23
4
72 134
-A
t ter
min
al st
rip T
B*X
1 ju
mpe
r te
rmin
als D
C-C
B*
and
10
- A
t ter
min
al st
rip T
B*1
mea
sure
re
sist
ance
bet
wee
n te
rmin
als 1
an
d2
-R
elay
R*0
0 w
ill e
nerg
ize
- Ze
ro w
hen
jum
per i
s on;
infin
ite w
hen
jum
per i
s off
5E-
204
Loop
FT
098
Loop
FT09
9
Loop
FT10
0
With
a 4
-20
mA
cal
ibra
tor i
njec
t a
4-20
mA
sign
al b
etw
een
term
inal
TB
2,
14 a
nd 1
5
FR 0
98 re
cord
er w
ill re
ad 0
GPM
at 4
mA
an
d 62
50 +
/- 10
GPM
at 2
0 m
A.
FR09
9 re
cord
er w
ill re
ad 0
GPM
at 4
mA
an
d 20
80 +
/- 10
GPM
at 2
0 m
A.
FR10
0 re
cord
er w
ill re
ad 0
GPM
at 4
mA
an
d 97
20 +
/-10
GPM
at 2
0 m
A*
- Pum
p U
nit N
o.
07/0
2/12
20
47Pu
mp
Con
trol P
anel
A
-3
FLUSHING AND CHLORINATION CHECKLIST
Contractor’s Plan, as a minimum, shall address the following items:
FLUSHING PHASE
· Identify location of discharges· Indicate where discharge is going (truck, tank, storm drain, sewer)· If sewer, provide approval by sanitary district· Mention whether or not flow goes into waterway (if yes, indicate discharge distance)· Indicate location of monitoring/test points on source main· Specify feed size· Indicate number and size of blowoffs and hoses attached to blowoffs· Calculate estimated flush rate (gal/min) and flush time· Test and record source main results
CHLORINATION PHASE
· Identify who will be doing the chlorinating· Indicate number of trained contractor personnel to be present· Specify pump to be used· Indicate method of testing for chlorine residue· Calculate estimated time to chlorinate and amount of chlorine to be used· Specify method of verifying no chlorine intrusion to the source main· Indicate sequence of valve operation where applicable· Indicate method of communication· During and after chlorination, test and record source main results
DECHLORINATION PHASE
· Specify dechlorination method· Indicate location of disposal· Indicate method of testing for chlorine residue, and record test results
During all phases of flushing, pH levels shall not drop below 6.5 or rise above 8.5.
02/28/02A- Appendix A
TRAINING EVALUATION
Thank you for your time and cooperation in completing this course evaluation. Please answer all questions honestly. Your response will help in improving, if necessary, and planning future programs. We want to know what you think. Please print or write legibly.
Employee Name Job Title (optional)
Workshop Title Date
Instructor Location
Check only one appropriate for each question.
EXCELLENTABOVE
AVERAGE AVERAGEBELOW
AVERAGE POOR5 4 3 2 1
1. Quality of course content.........................................................
2. Organization of course content................................................
3. Ability to use the course material in your job ...........................
4. How much you learned from the training .................................
5. Instructor’s knowledge of the topic ..........................................
6. Instructor’s ability to communicate courseinformation to you ....................................................................
7. Instructor’s ability to hold your interest duringthe training...............................................................................
8. Instructor’s presentation methods............................................
9. Overall instructor rating............................................................
10. Overall worth of training...........................................................
The training can be improved by:
What I liked most about the training was:
I will apply the material learned to my job in these ways
Would you recommend this training to fellow employees (same classification)? Yes No
Why or why not?
UF010-51.doc Q-025 8/98
02/28/02A- Appendix A
ftTD
HH
z
%ft.
%
% %
C
alcu
late
Ove
rall
Effi
cien
cy a
t Des
ign
Con
ditio
n:
C
alcu
late
Pum
p E
ffici
ency
at D
esig
n C
ondi
tion:
876543
Pum
p E
ffici
ency
(%
)
Sou
nd
Leve
l
(dB
A)
X
2
Con
ditio
n
Flow
(M
GD
/ gp
m)
Spe
ed
(Hz
/ R
PM
)
Dis
char
ge
Pre
ssur
e (P
SIG
)
Suc
tion
Pre
ssur
e (P
SIG
)Y
1
YZ
XY
ZX
Ele
ctric
al
Pow
er
(kW
/ hp
)
Mot
or
Gua
rant
eed
Effi
cien
cy
(%)
Ove
rall
Effi
cien
cy
(%)
Pre
ss.(d
isch
arge
)M
otor
Sen
sor R
eadi
ngH
and
Hel
d
Top
Bea
ring
Test
Inst
rum
ent T
ags:
Vib
ratio
n (in
/sec
vel
ocity
)P
ress
. (su
ctio
n)
S
igna
ture
Man
ufac
ture
r Rep
rese
ntat
ive
Con
tract
or
RP
MFl
owU
pper
Bea
ring
Pum
p/m
otor
inte
rface
Mot
or N
omin
al E
ffici
ency
:
MC
SF
=
P
rint
Sta
tic D
isch
arge
at E
nd:
Sta
tic S
uctio
n at
End
:M
otor
Min
imum
Effi
cien
cy:
Bac
kgro
und
Sou
nd d
BA
:
Sou
nd L
evel
dB
A m
easu
red
@:
Dis
trict
Witn
ess
M
otor
S/N
:M
easu
red
R
eson
ant F
requ
ency
:P
ump
Des
ign
Con
ditio
n:
S
tatic
Dis
char
ge a
t Sta
rt:
S
tatic
Suc
tion
at S
tart:
Mot
or N
amep
late
hp:
gpm
@
Pum
p D
esig
n S
huto
ff:
Vert
ical
Tur
bine
Pum
p Pe
rfor
man
ce T
est D
ata
Form
Spe
c19
47S
ectio
n:33
12
23.1
0Ta
g:
P&
ID D
raw
ing:
Pum
ping
Pla
nt N
ame:
Alm
ond
PP
Dat
e:
Tim
e Te
st S
tart:
Ti
me
Test
Sto
p:N
omin
al T
est R
PM
: U
nit N
o.
Pum
p S
/N:
Dis
char
ge P
ipe
x
y
z
Not
es:
Spe
c 20
47
33 1
2 23
.10
Ver
tical
Tur
bine
Pum
ps
Photo Confidentiality AgreementSpecification 2047
1. Contractor agrees to not distribute any construction photographs, images or videoof this construction project to outside or third parties, except with anysubcontractors, suppliers or others directly involved with the project.
2. Contractor agrees that written consent of Engineer must be obtained prior todistribution of photographs, images, or video to outside third parties. This needfor prior written consent includes, but is not limited to: publications or tradejournals, public relations displays, magazine articles and other media available tothe public.
3. Contractor agrees to exercise reasonable and prudent precautions and securitymeasures to protect the integrity and confidentiality of all photographs, imagesand video taken of the construction project.
Firm: ___________________________________
By (Signature): ____________________________
Title*: ___________________________________
Address: ________________________________
________________________________________
________________________________________
Phone: _________________________________
Date: ___________________________________
* Must be owner or officer of corporation
08/19/13 2047 A-45 Appendix A
APPENDIX B
MATERIALS ASSESSMENT TESTING
Includes laboratory testing results for lead based paint and asbestos.
1. EBMUD, Almond Pumping Plant Demolition Project Lead and Asbestos Survey,dated February 2, 2012.
2. PES Environmental, Results of Preliminary Field Screening InvestigationsEBMUD Reservoir, Pump and Filter Facilities Alameda and Contra Costa Counties, dated November 4, 1994.
3. EBMUD, Analytical Report dated May 31, 2012.
08/19/13 Appendix B 2047
EAST BAY MUNICIPAL UTILITY DISTRICT
DATE February 2, 2012
MEMO TO: Tom Boardman, Associate Civil Engineer
FROM: Sandra R. Beecher, Sr. Environmental Health and Safety Specialist
SUBJECT: Almond Pumping Plant Demolition Project Lead and Asbestos Survey
INTRODUCTION
The Almond Pumping Plant is going to be demolished. In preparation for this demolition, several bulk samples for lead and asbestos were taken.
RECOMMENDATIONS
Based on the current work plan, please implement the following: Inform the contractor of the results in the table below.
DISCUSSION (RESULTS) Sample results from the lead and asbestos survey conducted in the office area are below.
Date Sampled
Location Material Analyte Results
1/13/2012 Red paint on floor Paint Chip Lead 1700 mg/kg 1/13/2012 Yellow paint on Motor Paint Chip Lead 196 mg/kg 1/13/2012 Brown paint on inside
door Paint Chip Lead 17200 mg/kg
1/13/2012 White paint on floor Paint Chip lead 118 mg/kg 1/13/2012 Grey paint on pedestal Paint Chip lead 3680 mg/kg 1/13/2012 Brown paint on outside
of building Paint Chip Lead 34800 mg/kg
1/13/2012 Green paint on outside of building
Paint Chip Lead 1740 mg/kg
1/13/2012 Red paint on outside pipe
Paint Chip Lead 1770 mg/kg
1/13/2012 Roof Tile Piece of roof asbestos Non-detected1/13/2012 Outside pipe tar asbestos Non-detected 1/13/2012 Outside of building Silver tape asbestos Non-detected 1/13/2012 Outside concrete
platform Expansion joint material asbestos Non-detected
Unit #1, #2 Starter Cabinets
Arc chutes, black Arc chutes, black Arc chutes, black Arc chutes, black mesh cable
Asbestos WHS visual inspection (Suspected asbestos)
Archive Info Ceiling Paint Chip Lead 5450 mg/kg Archive Info Pipes Paint Chip Lead 2460 mg/kg Archive Info Wall Paint Chip Lead 5750 mg/kg Archive Info Motor Paint Chip Lead 24.1 mg/kg
EAST BAY MUNICIPAL UTILITY DISTRICTLaboratory Services DivisionPhone (510)287-1432 Fax (510)465-5462PO Box 24055, MS 59, Oakland, CA 94623
Reported by: Approved by:
Analytical Report Prepared for SANDY BEECHER
Report generated on: May 31, 2012 03:42 pmLogin No.: L175357
___________________________________ ___________________________________ KENNETH GERSTMAN NIRMELA ARSEM Laboratory Program Manager Laboratory Services Division Manager
LSR B784-0706-1Project Title: Analytical Support for the Workplace Health and Safety Section - Water System
Login Performance Summary2 - Samples received by the lab on: May 17 2012, 01:49 pm0 - Lost Analyses0 - Hold Time ExceedencesTurn-around-time met
Samples included in this report: Sample Type Collected Site Locator ClientID L175357-1 GRAB 14-May-2012 10:00 MISC MISC 1JC5/14/12 El Portal valve pit Lead L175357-2 GRAB 14-May-2012 10:15 MISC MISC 2JC5/14/12 El Portal valve pit Lead
Legend to the laboratory qualifiers used in this report:No qualifiers are included in this report
California Environmental Laboratory Accreditation Program Certificate Number 1060
Page 1 of 3
EAST BAY MUNICIPAL UTILITY DISTRICT Laboratory Services Division PO Box 24055, MS 59, Oakland, CA 94623 Phone (510)287-1432 Fax (510)465-5462
Analytical Results Report
LSR B784-0706-1 Analytical Support for the Workplace Health and Safety Section -Site: MISC Miscellaneous - Unidentified SiteLocator: MISC Miscellaneous sample, see sample comments for locationClientID: 1JC5/14/12 El Portal valve pit LeadLab ID: L175357-1 (P181957-1) Rush - 10 working daysSample Type: GRAB (Instantaneous Grab)Date Collected: May 14 2012, 10:00am Sample collector: SBeecherDate Received: May 17 2012, 01:49pm Sample receiver: DNGSample Comments: 1JC5/14/12 El Portal valve pit - valve pit lead - Black paint on motor
Method Reference Matrix TagParameter Qualifier Result Units Dilution MDL RL/ML
Method: EPA 6010 - ICP Scan MiscSolidTARGET ANALYTESLEAD 570 mg/kg .746 5.97Run ID: R228862 / Work Group No.: WG176712Prep Date1: 31-MAY-12 Analyzed 31-May-12 10:23
RL is either the client requested or regulatory mandated Reporting Limit. ML is the regulatory mandated Minimum Level
Page 2 of 3
EAST BAY MUNICIPAL UTILITY DISTRICT Laboratory Services Division PO Box 24055, MS 59, Oakland, CA 94623 Phone (510)287-1432 Fax (510)465-5462
Analytical Results Report
LSR B784-0706-1 Analytical Support for the Workplace Health and Safety Section -Site: MISC Miscellaneous - Unidentified SiteLocator: MISC Miscellaneous sample, see sample comments for locationClientID: 2JC5/14/12 El Portal valve pit LeadLab ID: L175357-2 (P181957-2) Rush - 10 working daysSample Type: GRAB (Instantaneous Grab)Date Collected: May 14 2012, 10:15am Sample collector: SBeecherDate Received: May 17 2012, 01:49pm Sample receiver: DNGSample Comments: 2JC5/14/12 El Portal valve pit - Black paint on Valve Pit Piping
Method Reference Matrix TagParameter Qualifier Result Units Dilution MDL RL/ML
Method: EPA 6010 - ICP Scan MiscSolidTARGET ANALYTESLEAD 37.4 mg/kg .556 4.44Run ID: R228862 / Work Group No.: WG176712Prep Date1: 31-MAY-12 Analyzed 31-May-12 10:26
RL is either the client requested or regulatory mandated Reporting Limit. ML is the regulatory mandated Minimum Level
Page 3 of 3
A P P E N D I X C
LISTING OF SOLE-SOURCED PRODUCTS SPECIFIED IN THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
08/19/13 Appendix C2047
A P P E N D I X C
LISTING OF SOLE-SOURCED PRODUCTS SPECIFIEDIN THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
Specification Section
Product Reason for Selection
26 05 26 –Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems
Deutsche GroundLok radial swage connectors
This product is the only compression connector approved in the PG&E Interconnection Handbook, Drawing #067910 “Grounding Requirements for Outdoor Electrical Substations”.
Note that we have also allowed exothermic welded connections for the same application as the Deutsche GroundLok radial swage connectors and have listed two acceptable manufacturers or equal for the exothermic welded connections.
26 09 13 –Electrical Power Monitoring and Control
Electro Industries, Nexus 1272,part number 1272-A-SWB2-20-60-DE-INP202-COMEXT3.MC
Electro Industries, optical probe,part number A9U.
The specified product is needed for operational compatibility with the existing power monitoring, control, and communication system used by the District.
27 21 16 – Data Communications Routers, CSU/DSU, Multiplexers, Codecs, and Modems
Synxcom leased line modem, for RTU lease line, part number SM19202FP-K-DIN, V2.10 or above.
The specified product is needed for operational compatibility with the existing communication system used by the District.
33 09 70 –Instrumentation and Control for ElectricalUtilities
Wonderware Upg, Development Studio Large 5000 / 3000 / 1000
Wonderware Upg, Wonderware Historian Server Standard, 1000 Tag.
The specified product is a license upgradeand training for software that the District already owns. The specified product is needed for operational compatibility with the existing power monitoring, control, and communication system used by the District.
08/19/132047 Appendix C
33 72 33 –Control House Equipment
Schweitzer Engineering Laboratories, multifunction motor protection relay, Type SEL 710, part number 071001ACA5X72820201.
The specified product is needed for operational compatibility with the existing power monitoring, control, and communication system used by the District.
33 72 33 –Control House Equipment
Schweitzer Engineering Laboratories, overcurrent relay, Type SEL 501-2, part number 05012W32561PXB2.
The specified product is needed for operational compatibility with the existing power monitoring, control, and communication system used by the District.
33 72 33 –Control House Equipment
Schweitzer Engineering Laboratories, fiber-optic RTD transmitter, Type SEL 2600A, part number 2600A01X.
The specified product is needed for operational compatibility with the existing power monitoring, control, and communication system used by the District.
33 72 33 –Control House Equipment
Schweitzer Engineering Laboratories, bus differential relay, Type SEL-587Z, part number 0587Z02225H12XX.
The specified product is needed for operational compatibility with the existing power monitoring, control, and communication system used by the District.
33 72 33 –Control House Equipment
Schweitzer Engineering Laboratories, GPS clock, Type SEL-2407 and related accessories.
The specified product is needed for operational compatibility with the existing power monitoring, control, and communication system used by the District.
33 72 33 –Control House Equipment
Novatech Orion LXcommunications processor, part number OrionLX-A14-B2-ENEN-MDM-CPX-MMB-XM4-IHV-HV-HVxx-01-03-04-07-14-32-42-44-47-49-57-81-94-95-96-99 and related accessories.
The specified product is needed for operational compatibility with the existing power monitoring, control, and communication system used by the District.
33 72 33 –Control House Equipment
Schweitzer Engineering Laboratories, I/O processor, Type SEL-2411, part number 241102C3C2X3C3C1101.
The specified product is needed for operational compatibility with the existing power monitoring, control, and communication system used by the District.
08/19/132047 Appendix C
33 72 33 –Control House Equipment
Schweitzer Engineering Laboratories, fiber-optic transceiver and modem, Type SEL 2812MT and Type SEL 2812MR.
The specified product is needed for operational compatibility with the existing power monitoring, control, and communication system used by the District.
33 72 33 –Control House Equipment
Schweitzer Engineering Laboratories, EIA-232 to EIA-485 interface converter, Type SEL 2886.
The specified product is needed for operational compatibility with the existing power monitoring, control, and communication system used by the District.
33 72 33 –Control House Equipment
Schweitzer Engineering Laboratories, Ethernet security gateway, Type SEL 3620, part number 3620XHB0XXX1.
The specified product is needed for operational compatibility with the existing power monitoring, control, and communication system used by the District.
33 72 33 –Control House Equipment
Schweitzer Engineering Laboratories, relay test source, Type SEL-4000.
The specified product is needed for operational compatibility with the existing power monitoring, control, and communication system used by the District.
33 72 33 –Control House Equipment
Schweitzer Engineering Laboratories, relay data courier, Type SEL-4391.
The specified product is needed for operational compatibility with the existing power monitoring, control, and communication system used by the District.
33 72 33 –Control House Equipment
Schweitzer Engineering Laboratories, arc-flash test module, Type SEL-4520.
The specified product is needed for operational compatibility with the existing power monitoring, control, and communication system used by the District.
33 72 33 –Control House Equipment
Schweitzer Engineering Laboratories, relay database management software, Type SEL-5010.
The specified product is needed for operational compatibility with the existing power monitoring, control, and communication system used by the District.
33 72 33 –Control House Equipment
Schweitzer Engineering Laboratories, relay event report analysis software, Type SEL-5601.
The specified product is needed for operational compatibility with the existing power monitoring, control, and communication system used by the District.
08/19/132047 Appendix C
40 94 33 –Operator Interface Units
Maple Systems, part number HMI5150P, with PLC connecting cable, part number 7446-0137-5,USB configuration cable, part number 7431-0115, and windows-based configuration software, part number EZware.
The specified product is needed for operational compatibility with the existing communication system used by the District.
40 94 43 –Programmable Logic Process Controllers
Programmable Logic Controller (PLC): Rockwell Automation MicroLogix 1400 1766-L32BXBA
The specified product is needed for operational compatibility with the existing communication system used by the District.
40 94 43 –Programmable Logic Process Controllers
PLC Modbus RS-485Communication Adapter:Rockwell Automation Memory Module 1763-NC01.
The specified product is needed for operational compatibility with the existing communication system used by the District.
40 94 43 –Programmable Logic Process Controllers
PLC Memory Module: Provide one memory module for each MicroLogix PLC supplied in this specification. Rockwell Automation Memory Module 1766-MM1
The specified product is needed for operational compatibility with the existing communication system used by the District.
40 94 43 –Programmable Logic Process Controllers
PLC 4 Channel Analog Input Expansion Module: Rockwell Automation MicroLogix 1400 1762-IF4
The specified product is needed for operational compatibility with the existing communication system used by the District.
40 94 43 –Programmable Logic Process Controllers
PLC Programming Software:Rockwell Automation RSLogix 500 Standard Edition, 9324-RL0300ENE.
The specified product is needed for operational compatibility with the existing communication system used by the District.
40 94 43 –Programmable Logic Process Controllers
PLC Interface Cables: Rockwell Automation 1761-CBL-PM02and 1747-CP3.
The specified product is needed for operational compatibility with the existing communication system used by the District.
40 94 43 –Programmable Logic Process Controllers
Remote Telemetry Unit (RTU): Control Microsystems SCADAPack TBUP357-1A20-AB20
The specified product is needed for operational compatibility with the existing communication system used by the District.
40 94 43 –Programmable Logic Process Controllers
RTU Interface Cables: Control Microsystems TBUM297218 and TBUM297217.
The specified product is needed for operational compatibility with the existing communication system used by the District.
08/19/132047 Appendix C
A P P E N D I X D
ALAMEDA COUNTYENCROACHMENT PERMIT FORMS
AND TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN
08/19/13 Appendix D2047
Work Order Number:*
Permit Number:
*This WO is ____ / is not _____ open for charges. Permit Issuance Date:__________________ Permit Expiration Date:
COUNTY OF ALAMEDA PUBLIC WORKS AGENCY ROADWAY ENCROACHMENT PERMIT
This Permit is issued in accordance with Chapter 12.08 of the Alameda County General Ordinance Code Name & Address of Property Owner: Job Site Address: ____________________________________ _____________________________________ ____________________________________ _____________________________________ ____________________________________ Phone Number: (This statement to be completed by the Agency)
Name & Address of Contractor: This permit is issued to the owner __ / contractor __ ; ____________________________________ if “owner” is checked, he/she is __ / is not ___exempt ____________________________________ from the requirement that work in the roadway be ____________________________________ performed by a licensed contractor. Phone Number:
The Applicant intends to perform the following work scope: Licensed Contractor Declaration: Worker’s Compensation Insurance Declaration: I hereby affirm, under penalty of perjury, that I hold the following contractor’s license, which is in full force and effect, under the applicable provisions of the State Business and Professions Code.
I hereby affirm, under penalty of perjury, that I will, during the performance of any and all work authorized by this permit, satisfy the requirements of the State Labor Code with regard to Worker’s Compensation Insurance, as declared below:
License Class and No. ___ I will maintain a certificate of consent to self-insure. Contractor’s Signature: ___ I will maintain the following insurance policy: Carrier’s Name and Policy No.:
___ I will not employ any person in any manner so as to become subject to the worker’s compensation laws of the State.
Owner’s/Contractor’s Signature:
All work and/or access shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of Chapter 12.08 and, unless otherwise specified below, shall be fully compliant with each of the terms and conditions of the attached General Provisions: ______________________________________________________________________________ Bond Information:
Insp. Fee ___ or Deposit ___:
BY:__________________, Alameda County
Work Completed (Date):________________ Inspector:
I certify that the information that I have entered into this permit application is correct, and I agree to comply with all of the terms and conditions and other requirements of the issued Permit. _____________________________________________ ___________________ Signature of Applicant Date
THIS PERMIT IS INCOMPLETE WITHOUT THE ATTACHED GENERAL PROVISIONS
CALL THIS NUMBER FOR INSPECTIONS:
INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS All encroachments authorized by this Permit shall be subject to monitoring, inspection, and/or
testing by a County representative; notify the County before you start work by calling the number on the front of this form.
If the face of this Permit is marked to indicate that the assigned County work order is open for charges, a
job account will be opened and the assigned inspectors and other representatives will charge the actual cost of all required tests and inspections against this account. All cost overruns must be resolved prior to closeout of this Permit. Any underruns will be returned to the Permittee as soon as possible following the closeout.
Revised 4/1/04
CAUTION!
Most traffic signals and some streetlights are connected to their power sources with underground wiring. Many signals are also wired to traffic detector loops buried in the roadway. None of these County-owned wiring runs are included in the Underground Service Alert (USA) review and marking processes. If you intend to excavate within 500’ of a traffic signal, or in proximity to County-owned
streetlights, you must contact the County traffic signal maintenance office at →(510) 670 - 5537←
at least 48 hours in advance of the start of your planned work.
If you cause a signal outage, a streetlight failure, or other damage to County signal or streetlight facilities because you failed to contact the signal office to get the facilities marked, you will be billed for the full cost of our emergency response and repairs.
Final Road Closure Analysis
Report
Almond Pumping Plant Replacement Project in CastroValley Prepared for
East Bay Municipal Utility District (EBMUD)
Prepared By
1970 Broadway, Suite 740Oakland, CA 94612(510) 763 2061
April 16, 2013
Final Road Closure Analysis Report for the EBMUDAlmond Pumping Plant Replacement Project in CastroValley
i April 16, 2013
Table of ContentsROAD CLOSURE ANALYSIS REPORT.......................................................................................... 2
INTRODUCTION............................................................................................................................... 2EXISTING TRAFFIC CONDITIONS...................................................................................................... 2
Roadway Network .................................................................................................................... 2Traffic Volumes ........................................................................................................................ 2
ROAD CLOSURE ANALYSIS............................................................................................................... 5TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN................................................................................................................. 5SUMMARY AND RECOMMENDATIONS......................................................................................... 11
STUDY PARTICIPANTS............................................................................................................ 12
DKS PERSONNEL............................................................................................................................ 12OTHERS ............................................................................................................................... .......... 12REFERENCES ............................................................................................................................... ... 12
List of AppendicesAPPENDIX A – 24 HOUR WEEKDAY TRAFFIC COUNTSAPPENDIX B – TRAFFIC DETOUR AND CONTROL PLANS
List of FiguresFigure 1: Project Location ............................................................................................................... 3Figure 2: Traffic Volumes ................................................................................................................ 4Figure 3: Detour route for 173rd Avenue road closure between Ehle Street and Roberto Street 8Figure 4: Detour route for 173rd Avenue road closure between Roberto Street and Robey Drive 9Figure 5: Detour route for Robey Drive/174th Avenue road closure between 173rd Avenue and
President Drive....................................................................................................................... 10
p:\p\11\11037-001 ebmud castro valley almond road pumping plant replacement project\report\report 010413.docx
Final Road Closure Analysis Report for the EBMUDAlmond Pumping Plant Replacement Project in CastroValley
2 April 16, 2013
ROAD CLOSURE ANALYSIS REPORT
IntroductionEast Bay Municipal Utility District (EBMUD) has retained DKS Associates to analyze traffic impactand develop traffic control design for the Almond Pumping Plant Replacement Project in theunincorporated area of Castro Valley in Alameda County. EBMUD plans to replace the existingpipelines along 173rd Avenue and 174th Avenue in Castro Valley to increase the flow capacity tothe new pumping plant. The pipeline construction will include the following:
1500 feet of 36” diameter pipeline located along 173rd Avenue from Ehle Street toRobey Drive and continuing located along Robey Drive/174th Avenue to President Drive.
700 feet of 6” diameter pipeline located along Robey Drive/174th Avenue from 173rdAvenue to President Drive.
800 feet of 2” diameter pipeline located along Robey Drive/174th Avenue from 173rdAvenue to President Drive.
This construction project will require roadway closure to provide the work crews sufficient workspace and to protect the public from the work zone. The primary goal of the road closure analysisis to develop traffic circulation, control, and construction phasing plans to minimize constructionimpacts to local residents in the project area. Also, the objective of the analysis is to provideaccess to/from private residence during the duration of the construction.
Figure 1 shows the project limit and location.
Existing Traffic Conditions
Roadway Network173rd Avenue is a narrow (i.e. approximately 24 feet to 27 feet wide) two lane north southresidential collector street in Castro Valley. Parking is allowed on both sides of the street, whichreduces the effective width of the roadway for traffic flow. 173rd Avenue extends northerly fromFoothill Boulevard and terminates at Robey Drive. 173rd Avenue carries approximately 466vehicles per day.
Robey Drive/174th Avenue is a narrow (i.e. approximately 18 – 24 feet wide) two lane windingresidential roadway in Castro Valley. Robey Avenue extends southerly to become 174th Avenue.Robey Drive/174th Avenue carries approximately 189 vehicles per day.
Traffic VolumesFigure 2 shows the weekday a.m. peak hour, p.m. peak hour, and daily directional traffic volumesfor 173rd Avenue and Robey Drive/174th Avenue. Quality Counts, a data collection firm,conducted the 24 hour counts on June 19, 2012. The purpose of conducting the traffic counts isto assess the potential impact of the road closures for the pipeline construction, and to identifytraffic impacts during peak periods. Appendix A contains the traffic counts. DKS staff visited theproject site to observe existing site conditions and traffic patterns.
Final Road Closure Analysis Report for the EBMUDAlmond Pumping Plant Replacement Project in CastroValley
5 April 16, 2013
Road Closure AnalysisAs noted, DKS staff conducted field review to determine if there are any opportunities to provideroom for traffic flow during construction. Typically, 36 inch pipeline require approximately 25 feetto 30 feet work zone width to accommodate construction equipment. This implies that it will notbe feasible to maintain one lane for traffic within the construction zone along 173rd Avenue and174th Avenue, which may impact local residents in the area.
Also, typical work production rate for installing a 36 inch pipeline is between 80 and 200 feet perday. However, it is conservative to assume a production rate of approximately 80 feet per daydue to the inherent challenges involved in installing pipelines along roadway segments with sharpcurves and bends. The production rate will determine the duration for the pipeline replacementproject and road closures.
In addition to pipeline construction, the roadway segments will need to be closed for servicetransfer, trench restoration, and road reconstruction/resurfacing activities.
Traffic Control PlanDKS has developed traffic detour plans and traffic control schemes to minimize traffic impact andinconvenience to local residents. It was determined from analyzing the 24 hour traffic volumesthat there are currently very low traffic (i.e. less than 40 vehicles per hour) on 173rd Avenue andRobey Drive/174th Avenue throughout the day. Therefore, it is recommended to extend the dailywork hours so as to increase the work production rate to shorten the construction duration. Thehours between 9:00 a.m. and 6:00 p.m. can be considered. The objective of shortening theconstruction duration is to minimize traffic impact to residents.
Figures 3, 4, and 5 show the traffic detour plans for the road closures for the pipelineconstruction. As shown in the figures, residents will have access to alternative routes to bypassthe construction area. The road closure for construction will be done in three phases (i.e. Phases1, 2, and 3) as shown on Plans TC 3, TC 4, and TC 5 respectively. The following paragraphsdescribe the details of the detour routes and recommendations to provide access to residentsaffected by the pipeline construction.
It is recommended to provide notification to residents regarding the proposed pipelinereplacement project. The notification should include the following:
1. The expected duration and date of completion of the construction,
2. On street parking permit from Alameda County, and
3. Detour maps to inform residents about alternative routes to bypass the construction workzones.
Additionally, whenever possible, residents will be allowed access to their homes by showingappropriate identification (ID). This can be done by deploying flaggers at both ends of theconstruction zones to check IDs. This solution is particularly relevant to the pipeline constructionalong Robey Drive/174th Avenue between 173rd Avenue and President Drive. The contractor maybe instructed to provide safe passage of vehicles through the construction work zone.
Final Road Closure Analysis Report for the EBMUDAlmond Pumping Plant Replacement Project in CastroValley
6 April 16, 2013
Also, to minimize inconvenience to residents, it is recommended to open the roadway for trafficat the end of each work day. The contractor will be required to cover the trenches with platesthat have adequate strength for the safe passage of vehicles, and park construction equipmenton the side of the road to create room for traffic.
Phase 1 Road ClosureFigure 3 shows the closure of 173rd Avenue between Ehle Street and Roberto Street for thepipeline construction. The length of the roadway segment is approximately 340 feet.
To conservatively estimate the construction duration for the pipeline installation in the roadwaysegment, a work production rate of 80 feet per day will result in completing the constructionwithin approximately five (5) days. As shown in Figure 3, local residents can use Ehle Street, 170th
Avenue, and Roberto Street to bypass the construction area. The applicable detailed trafficcontrol plans are shown on Plans TC 1, TC 2, and TC 3 contained in Appendix B.
Phase 2 Road ClosureFigure 4 shows the closure of 173rd Avenue between Roberto Street and Robey Drive for thepipeline construction. The length of the roadway segment is approximately 245 feet. Toconservatively estimate the construction duration for the pipeline installation in the roadwaysegment, a work production rate of 80 feet per day will result in completing the constructionwithin approximately four (4) days. As shown in Figure 4, local residents can use Ehle Street, 170th
Avenue, and Robey Drive to bypass the construction area. The applicable detailed traffic controlplan is shown on Plan TC 4 contained in Appendix B.
Phase 3 Road ClosureFigure 5 shows the closure of Robey Drive/174th Avenue between 173rd Avenue and PresidentDrive for the pipeline construction. There will be three road closures for this road segment withdurations described as follows:
3a. First Road Closure for Robey Dr/174th Ave
The road segment will be closed for pipeline installation. The length of the roadwaysegment is approximately 900 feet. To conservatively estimate the construction durationfor the pipeline installation in the roadway segment, a work production rate of 80 feet perday will result in completing the construction within approximately 12 days. With a workproduction rate of approximately 80 feet per day, it is expected that the actual work zonefor the construction equipment will be within 400 feet; therefore approximately 500 feetof the roadway should be accessible to local residents who live along Robey Drive/174thAvenue at any given time during construction. The residents will be allowed access byshowing appropriate identification. As shown in Figure 5, local residents can use 170thAvenue, 173rd Avenue, Roberto Street and President Drive to bypass the constructionarea.
Final Road Closure Analysis Report for the EBMUDAlmond Pumping Plant Replacement Project in CastroValley
7 April 16, 2013
3b. Second Road Closure for Robey Dr/174th AveA portion of the road will be closed to accommodate the transfer of service from the temporary2” pipeline to the 6” pipeline and Asphalt Concrete (AC) patching work. This construction activityis expected to last for duration of approximately five (5) days.
3c. Third Road Closure for Robey Dr/174th AveThe third road closure would include removing temporary Asphalt Concrete (AC) road surfaceand reconstructing new and permanent road pavement base and AC road surface. This activity isexpected to last for duration of approximately seven (7) days.
The applicable detailed traffic control plan is shown on Plan TC 5 contained in Appendix B.
Final Road Closure Analysis Report for the EBMUDAlmond Pumping Plant Replacement Project in CastroValley
11 April 16, 2013
Summary and Recommendations1. Typically, 36 inch pipeline require approximately 25 feet to 30 feet work zone width to
accommodate construction equipment. This implies that it will not be feasible to maintainone lane to traffic within the construction zone along 173rd Avenue and 174th Avenue,which may impact local residents in the area.
2. A typical work production rate for installing a 36 inch pipeline is approximately 80 feet perday based on the inherent challenges involved in installing pipelines along roadways withsharp curves and bends. The production rate will determine the duration for the pipelinereplacement project. The construction duration for the various pipeline segments isexpected to be completed as follows assuming a work production rate of 80 feet per day(i.e. conservative estimate):
173rd Avenue between Ehle Street and Roberto Street – approximately five (5)days.
o The tie in at 173rd Avenue/Ehle Street – approximately seven (7) days.
173rd Avenue between Roberto Street and Robey Drive – approximately four (4)days.
Robey Drive/174th Avenue between 173rd Avenue and President Drive –approximately 12 days.
o The tie in at 174th Street/President Drive – approximately seven (7) days.
3. It is recommended to provide notification to residents regarding the proposed pipelinereplacement project. The notification should include the following:
The expected duration and date of completion of the construction,
On street parking permit from Castro Valley, and
Detour maps to inform residents about alternative routes to bypass theconstruction work zones.
Portable changeable message sign (PCMS) located on each side of road closure.
4. Whenever possible, residents will be allowed access to their homes if they are locatedwithin a closed roadway segment. They will be allowed by showing appropriateidentification. The contractor may be instructed to provide safe passage of vehiclesthrough the construction work zone.
5. It is recommended to open the roadway for traffic at the end of each work day tominimize inconvenience to residents.
6. The contractor will be required to cover the trenches with plates that have adequatestrength for the safe passage of vehicles, and park construction equipment on the side ofthe road to create room for traffic.
Final Road Closure Analysis Report for the EBMUDAlmond Pumping Plant Replacement Project in CastroValley
12 April 16, 2013
STUDY PARTICIPANTS
DKS PersonnelThomas Krakow, P.E. Principal In ChargeDavid Mahama, P.E. Project ManagerAlex Ha, E.I.T. Transportation EngineerDeserae Mallori Word Processing and Graphic Designer
OthersMarshall McLeod EBMUDSerge Terentieff, P.E. EBMUDQuality Traffic Counts Data Collection
References1. ITE Manual of Transportation Engineering Studies
2. Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD)
Appendix A – 24 Hour Weekday Traffic Counts
Type
of r
epor
t: Tu
be C
ount
- V
olum
e D
ata
SO
UR
CE
: Qua
lity
Cou
nts,
LLC
(http
://w
ww
.qua
lityc
ount
s.ne
t)
LOC
ATI
ON
:17
3rd
Ave
bet
wee
n E
hle
St a
nd R
ober
to S
tQ
C J
OB
#:
1077
8301
SPEC
IFIC
LO
CA
TIO
N:
100
ft fro
m
CIT
Y/ST
ATE
:C
astro
Val
ley,
CA
DIR
ECTI
ON
:N
BD
ATE
:Ju
n 19
201
2 - J
un 1
9 20
12
Star
t Tim
eM
onTu
e19
-Jun
-12
Wed
Thu
Fri
Ave
rage
Wee
kday
Hou
rly T
raffi
cSa
tSu
nA
vera
ge W
eek
Hou
rly T
raffi
cA
vera
ge W
eek
Prof
ile
12:0
0 A
M1
11
1:00
AM
11
12:
00 A
M2
22
3:00
AM
11
14:
00 A
M0
00
5:00
AM
22
26:
00 A
M2
22
7:00
AM
77
78:
00 A
M8
88
9:00
AM
44
410
:00
AM
99
911
:00
AM
99
912
:00
PM15
1515
1:00
PM
1414
142:
00 P
M8
88
3:00
PM
1616
164:
00 P
M21
2121
5:00
PM
2222
226:
00 P
M19
1919
7:00
PM
1111
118:
00 P
M16
1616
9:00
PM
1818
1810
:00
PM15
1515
11:0
0 PM
55
5D
ay T
otal
226
226
226
% W
eekd
ayA
vera
ge10
0.0%
% W
eek
Ave
rage
100.
0%10
0.0%
AM
Pea
k10
:00
AM
10:0
0 A
M10
:00
AM
Vol
ume
99
9P
M P
eak
5:00
PM
5:00
PM
5:00
PM
Vol
ume
2222
22C
omm
ents
:
Pag
e 1
of 1
Rep
ort g
ener
ated
on
6/20
/201
2 4:
30 P
M
Type
of r
epor
t: Tu
be C
ount
- V
olum
e D
ata
SO
UR
CE
: Qua
lity
Cou
nts,
LLC
(http
://w
ww
.qua
lityc
ount
s.ne
t)
LOC
ATI
ON
:17
3rd
Ave
bet
wee
n E
hle
St a
nd R
ober
to S
tQ
C J
OB
#:
1077
8301
SPEC
IFIC
LO
CA
TIO
N:
100
ft fro
m
CIT
Y/ST
ATE
:C
astro
Val
ley,
CA
DIR
ECTI
ON
:S
BD
ATE
:Ju
n 19
201
2 - J
un 1
9 20
12
Star
t Tim
eM
onTu
e19
-Jun
-12
Wed
Thu
Fri
Ave
rage
Wee
kday
Hou
rly T
raffi
cSa
tSu
nA
vera
ge W
eek
Hou
rly T
raffi
cA
vera
ge W
eek
Prof
ile
12:0
0 A
M2
22
1:00
AM
00
02:
00 A
M0
00
3:00
AM
11
14:
00 A
M3
33
5:00
AM
1313
136:
00 A
M13
1313
7:00
AM
1717
178:
00 A
M21
2121
9:00
AM
1111
1110
:00
AM
1717
1711
:00
AM
1212
1212
:00
PM20
2020
1:00
PM
1111
112:
00 P
M13
1313
3:00
PM
1010
104:
00 P
M10
1010
5:00
PM
1111
116:
00 P
M12
1212
7:00
PM
99
98:
00 P
M9
99
9:00
PM
1313
1310
:00
PM7
77
11:0
0 PM
55
5D
ay T
otal
240
240
240
% W
eekd
ayA
vera
ge10
0.0%
% W
eek
Ave
rage
100.
0%10
0.0%
AM
Pea
k8:
00 A
M8:
00 A
M8:
00 A
MV
olum
e21
2121
PM
Pea
k12
:00
PM
12:0
0 P
M12
:00
PM
Vol
ume
2020
20C
omm
ents
:
Pag
e 1
of 1
Rep
ort g
ener
ated
on
6/20
/201
2 4:
30 P
M
Type
of r
epor
t: Tu
be C
ount
- V
olum
e D
ata
SO
UR
CE
: Qua
lity
Cou
nts,
LLC
(http
://w
ww
.qua
lityc
ount
s.ne
t)
LOC
ATI
ON
:17
3rd
Ave
bet
wee
n E
hle
St a
nd R
ober
to S
tQ
C J
OB
#:
1077
8301
SPEC
IFIC
LO
CA
TIO
N:
100
ft fro
m
CIT
Y/ST
ATE
:C
astro
Val
ley,
CA
DIR
ECTI
ON
:N
B/S
BD
ATE
:Ju
n 19
201
2 - J
un 1
9 20
12
Star
t Tim
eM
onTu
e19
-Jun
-12
Wed
Thu
Fri
Ave
rage
Wee
kday
Hou
rly T
raffi
cSa
tSu
nA
vera
ge W
eek
Hou
rly T
raffi
cA
vera
ge W
eek
Prof
ile
12:0
0 A
M3
33
1:00
AM
11
12:
00 A
M2
22
3:00
AM
22
24:
00 A
M3
33
5:00
AM
1515
156:
00 A
M15
1515
7:00
AM
2424
248:
00 A
M29
2929
9:00
AM
1515
1510
:00
AM
2626
2611
:00
AM
2121
2112
:00
PM35
3535
1:00
PM
2525
252:
00 P
M21
2121
3:00
PM
2626
264:
00 P
M31
3131
5:00
PM
3333
336:
00 P
M31
3131
7:00
PM
2020
208:
00 P
M25
2525
9:00
PM
3131
3110
:00
PM22
2222
11:0
0 PM
1010
10D
ay T
otal
466
466
466
% W
eekd
ayA
vera
ge10
0.0%
% W
eek
Ave
rage
100.
0%10
0.0%
AM
Pea
k8:
00 A
M8:
00 A
M8:
00 A
MV
olum
e29
2929
PM
Pea
k12
:00
PM
12:0
0 P
M12
:00
PM
Vol
ume
3535
35C
omm
ents
:
Pag
e 1
of 1
Rep
ort g
ener
ated
on
6/20
/201
2 4:
30 P
M
Type
of r
epor
t: Tu
be C
ount
- V
olum
e D
ata
SO
UR
CE
: Qua
lity
Cou
nts,
LLC
(http
://w
ww
.qua
lityc
ount
s.ne
t)
LOC
ATI
ON
:17
4th
Ave
bet
wee
n 17
3rd
Ave
and
Pre
side
nt D
rQ
C J
OB
#:
1077
8302
SPEC
IFIC
LO
CA
TIO
N:
100
ft fro
m
CIT
Y/ST
ATE
:C
astro
Val
ley,
CA
DIR
ECTI
ON
:E
BD
ATE
:Ju
n 19
201
2 - J
un 1
9 20
12
Star
t Tim
eM
onTu
e19
-Jun
-12
Wed
Thu
Fri
Ave
rage
Wee
kday
Hou
rly T
raffi
cSa
tSu
nA
vera
ge W
eek
Hou
rly T
raffi
cA
vera
ge W
eek
Prof
ile
12:0
0 A
M2
22
1:00
AM
00
02:
00 A
M0
00
3:00
AM
11
14:
00 A
M0
00
5:00
AM
00
06:
00 A
M2
22
7:00
AM
22
28:
00 A
M3
33
9:00
AM
11
110
:00
AM
44
411
:00
AM
11
112
:00
PM7
77
1:00
PM
66
62:
00 P
M5
55
3:00
PM
77
74:
00 P
M7
77
5:00
PM
44
46:
00 P
M10
1010
7:00
PM
44
48:
00 P
M4
44
9:00
PM
77
710
:00
PM7
77
11:0
0 PM
00
0D
ay T
otal
8484
84%
Wee
kday
Ave
rage
100.
0%
% W
eek
Ave
rage
100.
0%10
0.0%
AM
Pea
k10
:00
AM
10:0
0 A
M10
:00
AM
Vol
ume
44
4P
M P
eak
6:00
PM
6:00
PM
6:00
PM
Vol
ume
1010
10C
omm
ents
:
Pag
e 1
of 1
Rep
ort g
ener
ated
on
6/20
/201
2 4:
30 P
M
Type
of r
epor
t: Tu
be C
ount
- V
olum
e D
ata
SO
UR
CE
: Qua
lity
Cou
nts,
LLC
(http
://w
ww
.qua
lityc
ount
s.ne
t)
LOC
ATI
ON
:17
4th
Ave
bet
wee
n 17
3rd
Ave
and
Pre
side
nt D
rQ
C J
OB
#:
1077
8302
SPEC
IFIC
LO
CA
TIO
N:
100
ft fro
m
CIT
Y/ST
ATE
:C
astro
Val
ley,
CA
DIR
ECTI
ON
:W
BD
ATE
:Ju
n 19
201
2 - J
un 1
9 20
12
Star
t Tim
eM
onTu
e19
-Jun
-12
Wed
Thu
Fri
Ave
rage
Wee
kday
Hou
rly T
raffi
cSa
tSu
nA
vera
ge W
eek
Hou
rly T
raffi
cA
vera
ge W
eek
Prof
ile
12:0
0 A
M1
11
1:00
AM
00
02:
00 A
M0
00
3:00
AM
00
04:
00 A
M1
11
5:00
AM
33
36:
00 A
M3
33
7:00
AM
1010
108:
00 A
M6
66
9:00
AM
77
710
:00
AM
66
611
:00
AM
33
312
:00
PM7
77
1:00
PM
55
52:
00 P
M5
55
3:00
PM
77
74:
00 P
M9
99
5:00
PM
77
76:
00 P
M4
44
7:00
PM
44
48:
00 P
M8
88
9:00
PM
22
210
:00
PM4
44
11:0
0 PM
33
3D
ay T
otal
105
105
105
% W
eekd
ayA
vera
ge10
0.0%
% W
eek
Ave
rage
100.
0%10
0.0%
AM
Pea
k7:
00 A
M7:
00 A
M7:
00 A
MV
olum
e10
1010
PM
Pea
k4:
00 P
M4:
00 P
M4:
00 P
MV
olum
e9
99
Com
men
ts:
Pag
e 1
of 1
Rep
ort g
ener
ated
on
6/20
/201
2 4:
30 P
M
Type
of r
epor
t: Tu
be C
ount
- V
olum
e D
ata
SO
UR
CE
: Qua
lity
Cou
nts,
LLC
(http
://w
ww
.qua
lityc
ount
s.ne
t)
LOC
ATI
ON
:17
4th
Ave
bet
wee
n 17
3rd
Ave
and
Pre
side
nt D
rQ
C J
OB
#:
1077
8302
SPEC
IFIC
LO
CA
TIO
N:
100
ft fro
m
CIT
Y/ST
ATE
:C
astro
Val
ley,
CA
DIR
ECTI
ON
:E
B/W
BD
ATE
:Ju
n 19
201
2 - J
un 1
9 20
12
Star
t Tim
eM
onTu
e19
-Jun
-12
Wed
Thu
Fri
Ave
rage
Wee
kday
Hou
rly T
raffi
cSa
tSu
nA
vera
ge W
eek
Hou
rly T
raffi
cA
vera
ge W
eek
Prof
ile
12:0
0 A
M3
33
1:00
AM
00
02:
00 A
M0
00
3:00
AM
11
14:
00 A
M1
11
5:00
AM
33
36:
00 A
M5
55
7:00
AM
1212
128:
00 A
M9
99
9:00
AM
88
810
:00
AM
1010
1011
:00
AM
44
412
:00
PM14
1414
1:00
PM
1111
112:
00 P
M10
1010
3:00
PM
1414
144:
00 P
M16
1616
5:00
PM
1111
116:
00 P
M14
1414
7:00
PM
88
88:
00 P
M12
1212
9:00
PM
99
910
:00
PM11
1111
11:0
0 PM
33
3D
ay T
otal
189
189
189
% W
eekd
ayA
vera
ge10
0.0%
% W
eek
Ave
rage
100.
0%10
0.0%
AM
Pea
k7:
00 A
M7:
00 A
M7:
00 A
MV
olum
e12
1212
PM
Pea
k4:
00 P
M4:
00 P
M4:
00 P
MV
olum
e16
1616
Com
men
ts:
Pag
e 1
of 1
Rep
ort g
ener
ated
on
6/20
/201
2 4:
30 P
M
Appendix B – Traffic Detour and Control Plans
A P P E N D I X E
TITLE 22 REGULATED VOCS
08/19/13 Appendix E2047
EX
CE
RPT
[REH
1]-A
TT
AC
HM
EN
T 1
Regu
late
d C
onta
min
ants
with
PRI
MA
RY D
RIN
KIN
G W
ATE
R ST
AN
DA
RDS
Con
tam
inan
tU
nit
Mea
sure
men
t
MC
L[M
RD
L]
PHG
(MC
LG
)[M
RD
LG
]
Typ
ical
Sou
rce
of
Con
tam
inan
tH
ealth
Eff
ects
Lan
guag
e
Vol
atile
Org
anic
Con
tam
inan
tsB
enze
nepp
b1
0.15
Dis
char
ge fr
om p
last
ics,
dyes
and
ny
lon
fact
orie
s; le
achi
ng fr
om g
as
stor
age
tank
s and
land
fills
Som
e pe
ople
who
use
wat
er c
onta
inin
g be
nzen
e in
ex
cess
of t
he M
CL
over
man
y ye
ars m
ay e
xper
ienc
e an
emia
or a
dec
reas
e in
blo
od p
late
lets
, and
may
hav
e an
incr
ease
d ris
k of
get
ting
canc
er.
Car
bon
tetra
chlo
ride
ppt
500
100
Dis
char
ge fr
om c
hem
ical
pla
nts a
nd
othe
r ind
ustri
al a
ctiv
ities
Som
e pe
ople
who
use
wat
er c
onta
inin
g ca
rbon
te
trach
lorid
e in
exc
ess o
f the
MC
L ov
er m
any
year
s m
ay e
xper
ienc
e liv
er p
robl
ems a
nd m
ay h
ave
an
incr
ease
d ris
k of
get
ting
canc
er.
1,2-
Dic
hlor
oben
zene
ppb
600
600
Dis
char
ge fr
om in
dust
rial c
hem
ical
fa
ctor
ies
Som
e pe
ople
who
drin
k w
ater
con
tain
ing
1,2-
dich
loro
benz
ene
in e
xces
s of t
he M
CL
over
man
y ye
ars
may
exp
erie
nce
liver
, kid
ney,
or c
ircul
ator
y sy
stem
pr
oble
ms.
1,4-
Dic
hlor
oben
zene
ppb
56
Dis
char
ge fr
om in
dust
rial c
hem
ical
fa
ctor
ies
Som
e pe
ople
who
use
wat
er c
onta
inin
g 1.
4-di
chlo
robe
nzen
e in
exc
ess o
f the
MC
L ov
er m
any
year
s m
ay e
xper
ienc
e an
emia
, liv
er, k
idne
y, o
r spl
een
dam
age,
or c
hang
es in
thei
r blo
od.
1,1-
Dic
hlor
oeth
ane
ppb
53
Extra
ctio
n an
d de
grea
sing
solv
ent;
used
in th
e m
anuf
actu
re o
f ph
arm
aceu
tical
s, st
one,
cla
y, a
nd
glas
s pro
duct
s; fu
mig
ant
Som
e pe
ople
who
use
wat
er c
onta
inin
g 1,
1-di
chlo
roet
hane
in e
xces
s of t
he M
CL
over
man
y ye
ars
may
exp
erie
nce
nerv
ous s
yste
m o
r res
pira
tory
pro
blem
s.
1,2-
Dic
hlor
oeth
ane
ppt
500
400
Dis
char
ge fr
om in
dust
rial c
hem
ical
fa
ctor
ies
Som
e pe
ople
who
use
wat
er c
onta
inin
g 1,
2-di
chlo
roet
hane
in e
xces
s of t
he M
CL
over
man
y ye
ars
may
hav
e an
incr
ease
d ris
k of
get
ting
canc
er.
1,1-
Dic
hlor
oeth
ylen
epp
b6
10D
isch
arge
from
indu
stria
l che
mic
al
fact
orie
sSo
me
peop
le w
ho u
se w
ater
con
tain
ing
1,1-
dich
loro
ethy
lene
in e
xces
s of t
he M
CL
over
man
y ye
ars
may
exp
erie
nce
liver
pro
blem
s.ci
s-1,
2-D
ichl
oroe
thyl
ene
ppb
610
0D
isch
arge
from
indu
stria
l che
mic
al
fact
orie
s; m
ajor
bio
degr
adat
ion
bypr
oduc
t of T
CE
and
PCE
grou
ndw
ater
con
tam
inat
ion
Som
e pe
ople
who
use
wat
er c
onta
inin
g ci
s-1,
2-di
chlo
roet
hyle
ne in
exc
ess o
f the
MC
L ov
er m
any
year
s m
ay e
xper
ienc
e liv
er p
robl
ems.
2009
SW
S C
CR
Form
s &
Inst
ruct
ions
Revi
sed
Jan
2010
CC
R In
stru
ctio
ns –
Atta
chm
ents
1
Page
1of
3
Con
tam
inan
tU
nit
Mea
sure
men
t
MC
L[M
RD
L]
PHG
(MC
LG
)[M
RD
LG
]
Typ
ical
Sou
rce
of
Con
tam
inan
tH
ealth
Eff
ects
Lan
guag
e
trans
-1,2
-Dic
hlor
oeth
ylen
epp
b10
60D
isch
arge
from
indu
stria
l che
mic
al
fact
orie
s; m
inor
bio
degr
adat
ion
bypr
oduc
t of T
CE
and
PCE
grou
ndw
ater
con
tam
inat
ion
Som
e pe
ople
who
drin
k w
ater
con
tain
ing
trans
-1,2
-di
chlo
roet
hyle
ne in
exc
ess o
f the
MC
L ov
er m
any
year
s m
ay e
xper
ienc
e liv
er p
robl
ems.
Dic
hlor
omet
hane
ppb
54
Dis
char
ge fr
om p
harm
aceu
tical
and
ch
emic
al fa
ctor
ies;
inse
ctic
ide
Som
e pe
ople
who
drin
k w
ater
con
tain
ing
dich
loro
met
hane
in e
xces
s of t
he M
CL
over
man
y ye
ars
may
exp
erie
nce
liver
pro
blem
s and
may
hav
e an
in
crea
sed
risk
of g
ettin
g ca
ncer
.1,
2-D
ichl
orop
ropa
nepp
b5
0.5
Dis
char
ge fr
om in
dust
rial c
hem
ical
fa
ctor
ies;
prim
ary
com
pone
nt o
f so
me
fum
igan
ts
Som
e pe
ople
who
use
wat
er c
onta
inin
g 1,
2-di
chlo
ropr
opan
e in
exc
ess o
f the
MC
L ov
er m
any
year
s m
ay h
ave
an in
crea
sed
risk
of g
ettin
g ca
ncer
.1,
3-D
ichl
orop
rope
nepp
t50
020
0R
unof
f/lea
chin
g fr
om n
emat
ocid
e us
ed o
n cr
opla
nds
Som
e pe
ople
who
use
wat
er c
onta
inin
g 1,
3-di
chlo
ropr
open
e in
exc
ess o
f the
MC
L ov
er m
any
year
s m
ay h
ave
an in
crea
sed
risk
of g
ettin
g ca
ncer
.Et
hylb
enze
nepp
b30
030
0D
isch
arge
from
pet
role
um
refin
erie
s; in
dust
rial c
hem
ical
fa
ctor
ies
Som
e pe
ople
who
use
wat
er c
onta
inin
g et
hylb
enze
ne in
ex
cess
of t
he M
CL
over
man
y ye
ars m
ay e
xper
ienc
e liv
er o
r kid
ney
prob
lem
s.M
ethy
l-ter
t-but
yl e
ther
ppb
1313
Leak
ing
unde
rgro
und
stor
age
tank
s;
disc
harg
es fr
om p
etro
leum
and
ch
emic
al fa
ctor
ies
Som
e pe
ople
who
use
wat
er c
onta
inin
g m
ethy
l-ter
t-bu
tyl e
ther
in e
xces
s of t
he M
CL
over
man
y ye
ars m
ay
have
an
incr
ease
d ris
k of
get
ting
canc
er.
Mon
ochl
orob
enze
nepp
b70
200
Dis
char
ge fr
om in
dust
rial a
nd
agric
ultu
ral c
hem
ical
fact
orie
s and
dr
ycle
anin
g fa
cilit
ies
Som
e pe
ople
who
use
wat
er c
onta
inin
g m
onoc
hlor
oben
zene
in e
xces
s of t
he M
CL
over
man
y ye
ars m
ay e
xper
ienc
e liv
er o
r kid
ney
prob
lem
s.St
yren
epp
b10
0(1
00)
Dis
char
ge fr
omru
bber
and
pla
stic
fa
ctor
ies;
leac
hing
from
land
fills
Som
e pe
ople
who
drin
k w
ater
con
tain
ing
styr
ene
in
exce
ss o
f the
MC
L ov
er m
any
year
s may
exp
erie
nce
liver
, kid
ney,
or c
ircul
ator
y sy
stem
pro
blem
s.1,
1,2,
2-Te
trach
loro
etha
nepp
b1
0.1
Dis
char
ge fr
om in
dust
rial a
nd
agric
ultu
ral c
hem
ical
fact
orie
s;
solv
ent u
sed
in p
rodu
ctio
n of
TC
E,
pest
icid
es, v
arni
sh a
nd la
cque
rs
Som
e pe
ople
who
drin
k w
ater
con
tain
ing
1,1,
2,2-
tetra
chlo
roet
hane
in e
xces
s of t
he M
CL
over
man
y ye
ars
may
exp
erie
nce
liver
or n
ervo
us sy
stem
pro
blem
s.
Tetra
chlo
roet
hyle
ne (P
CE)
ppb
50.
06D
isch
arge
from
fact
orie
s, dr
y cl
eane
rs, a
nd a
uto
shop
s (m
etal
de
grea
ser)
Som
e pe
ople
who
use
wat
er c
onta
inin
g te
trach
loro
ethy
lene
in e
xces
s of t
he M
CL
over
man
y ye
ars m
ay e
xper
ienc
e liv
er p
robl
ems,
and
may
hav
ean
in
crea
sed
risk
of g
ettin
g ca
ncer
.1,
2,4-
Tric
hlor
oben
zene
ppb
55
Dis
char
ge fr
om te
xtile
-fini
shin
g fa
ctor
ies
Som
e pe
ople
who
use
wat
er c
onta
inin
g 1,
2,4-
trich
loro
benz
ene
in e
xces
s of t
he M
CL
over
man
y ye
ars
may
exp
erie
nce
adre
nal g
land
cha
nges
.
2009
SW
S C
CR
Form
s &
Inst
ruct
ions
Revi
sed
Jan
2010
CC
R In
stru
ctio
ns –
Atta
chm
ents
1
Page
2of
3
Con
tam
inan
tU
nit
Mea
sure
men
t
MC
L[M
RD
L]
PHG
(MC
LG
)[M
RD
LG
]
Typ
ical
Sou
rce
of
Con
tam
inan
tH
ealth
Eff
ects
Lan
guag
e
1,1,
1-Tr
ichl
oroe
than
epp
b20
010
00D
isch
arge
from
met
al d
egre
asin
g si
tes a
nd o
ther
fact
orie
s;
man
ufac
ture
of f
ood
wra
ppin
gs
Som
e pe
ople
who
use
wat
er c
onta
inin
g 1,
1,1-
trich
loro
etha
ne in
exc
ess o
f the
MC
L ov
er m
any
year
s m
ay e
xper
ienc
e liv
er, n
ervo
us sy
stem
, or c
ircul
ator
y sy
stem
pro
blem
s.1,
1,2-
Tric
hlor
oeth
ane
ppb
50.
3D
isch
arge
from
indu
stria
l che
mic
al
fact
orie
sSo
me
peop
le w
ho u
se w
ater
con
tain
ing
1,1,
2-tri
chlo
roet
hane
in e
xces
s of t
he M
CL
over
man
y ye
ars
may
exp
erie
nce
liver
, kid
ney,
or i
mm
une
syst
em
prob
lem
s.Tr
ichl
oroe
thyl
ene
(TC
E)pp
b5
1.7
Dis
char
ge fr
om m
etal
deg
reas
ing
site
s and
oth
er fa
ctor
ies
Som
e pe
ople
who
use
wat
er c
onta
inin
g tri
chlo
roet
hyle
ne in
exc
ess o
f the
MC
L ov
er m
any
year
s m
ay e
xper
ienc
e liv
er p
robl
ems a
nd m
ay h
ave
an
incr
ease
d ris
k of
get
ting
canc
er.
Tolu
ene
ppb
150
150
Dis
char
ge fr
om p
etro
leum
and
ch
emic
al fa
ctor
ies;
und
ergr
ound
gas
ta
nk le
aks
Som
e pe
ople
who
use
wat
er c
onta
inin
g to
luen
e in
ex
cess
of t
he M
CL
over
man
y ye
ars m
ay e
xper
ienc
e ne
rvou
s sys
tem
, kid
ney,
or l
iver
pro
blem
s.Tr
ichl
orof
luor
omet
hane
ppb
150
700
Dis
char
ge fr
om in
dust
rial f
acto
ries;
de
grea
sing
solv
ent;
prop
ella
nt a
nd
refr
iger
ant
Som
e pe
ople
who
use
wat
er c
onta
inin
g tri
chlo
roflu
orom
etha
ne in
exc
ess o
f the
MC
L ov
er m
any
year
s may
exp
erie
nce
liver
pro
blem
s.1,
1,2-
Tric
hlor
o-1,
2,2-
triflu
oroe
than
epp
m1.
24
Dis
char
ge fr
om m
etal
deg
reas
ing
site
s and
oth
erfa
ctor
ies;
dr
ycle
anin
g so
lven
t; re
frig
eran
t
Som
e pe
ople
who
use
wat
er c
onta
inin
g 1,
1,2-
trich
loro
-1,
2,2-
triflo
roet
hane
in e
xces
s of t
he M
CL
over
man
y ye
ars m
ay e
xper
ienc
e liv
er p
robl
ems.
Vin
yl c
hlor
ide
ppt
500
50Le
achi
ng fr
om P
VC
pip
ing;
di
scha
rge
from
pla
stic
s fac
torie
s;
biod
egra
datio
n by
prod
uct o
f TC
E an
d PC
E gr
ound
wat
er
cont
amin
atio
n
Som
e pe
ople
who
use
wat
er c
onta
inin
g vi
nyl c
hlor
ide
in
exce
ss o
f the
MC
L ov
er m
any
year
s may
hav
e an
in
crea
sed
risk
of g
ettin
g ca
ncer
.
Xyl
enes
ppm
1.75
01.
8D
isch
arge
from
pet
role
um a
nd
chem
ical
fact
orie
s; fu
el so
lven
tSo
me
peop
le w
ho u
se w
ater
con
tain
ing
xyle
nes i
n ex
cess
of t
he M
CL
over
man
y ye
ars m
ay e
xper
ienc
e ne
rvou
s sys
tem
dam
age.
2009
SW
S C
CR
Form
s &
Inst
ruct
ions
Revi
sed
Jan
2010
CC
R In
stru
ctio
ns –
Atta
chm
ents
1
Page
3of
3